1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes false
138 \output_changes false
152 by the \SpecialChar LyX
157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
159 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
160 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
161 Documentation mailing list:
162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
164 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
175 \begin_inset Newline newline
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Note Note
186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
187 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
194 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
202 \begin_layout Standard
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
211 \begin_layout Chapter
215 \begin_layout Section
216 What is \SpecialChar LyX
220 \begin_layout Standard
222 is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
282 's philosophy: most importantly,
283 the format of all of the manuals.
284 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
285 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
291 manual describes that, too.
294 \begin_layout Section
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
301 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
303 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
304 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
310 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
311 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
313 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
314 only a vertical scrollbar.
315 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
316 The first case is large images.
317 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
318 image and use the option
329 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
332 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
333 this doesn't work for equations yet.
336 \begin_layout Standard
337 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
338 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
346 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
353 \begin_layout Section
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
360 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
362 Just select the manual you want to read from the
369 \begin_layout Section
370 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
374 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
381 \begin_layout Standard
382 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
383 can be configured via the menu
385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
389 \begin_inset Index idx
392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
399 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 packages are available.
403 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
405 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
407 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
412 \begin_inset space \space{}
415 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
418 To force \SpecialChar LyX
419 to re-inspect your system, you should use
421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
425 \begin_inset Index idx
428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
429 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
435 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
436 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
439 \begin_layout Section
442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
444 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
451 \begin_layout Standard
452 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
453 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
454 installed, but you will not be
455 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
456 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
457 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
458 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
459 document can always be output as plain text
463 \begin_layout Standard
464 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
465 or DocBook classes or packages.
466 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
467 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
473 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
476 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
484 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
485 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 \begin_inset Note Note
495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
496 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
497 Code box prevent that the term
498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
506 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
507 More about \SpecialChar TeX
508 Code is described in section
513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
515 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
519 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 is explained in section
525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
527 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
537 \begin_inset Index idx
540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
547 See section 5.1 of the
551 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
555 \begin_layout Chapter
556 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
560 \begin_layout Section
561 Basic File Operations
562 \begin_inset Index idx
565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
574 \begin_layout Standard
579 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
580 in addition to some more advanced operations:
583 \begin_layout Itemize
605 \begin_layout Itemize
621 arg "buffer-new-template"
627 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
659 \begin_layout Itemize
673 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
707 arg "buffer-write-as"
713 \begin_layout Itemize
727 \begin_layout Itemize
741 \begin_layout Standard
742 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
743 a few minor differences.
746 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
757 command lists the available templates.
758 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
759 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
760 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
768 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
775 \begin_layout Standard
776 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
808 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
809 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
810 is just that — a big, blank space.
818 \begin_layout Standard
839 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
844 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
847 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
865 will reload the document from disk.
866 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
867 and want to restore it to the last save.
876 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
877 them as your changes.
880 \begin_layout Section
881 Basic Editing Features
882 \begin_inset Index idx
885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
894 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
901 \begin_layout Standard
902 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
903 can perform cut and paste operations
904 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
905 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
906 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
907 editing features and how to access
909 We will start with cut and paste.
912 \begin_layout Standard
913 As you might expect, the
917 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
918 various other editing features.
919 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
923 \begin_layout Itemize
929 \begin_inset Index idx
932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
961 \begin_layout Itemize
967 \begin_inset Index idx
970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
999 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset Index idx
1008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1033 \begin_layout Itemize
1037 \begin_inset space ~
1043 \begin_layout Itemize
1047 \begin_inset space ~
1053 \begin_layout Itemize
1057 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset space ~
1067 \begin_inset Index idx
1070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1079 \begin_inset Index idx
1082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1097 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1107 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1113 \begin_layout Standard
1114 The first three are self-explanatory.
1115 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1116 and other programs by
1137 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1138 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1143 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1144 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1145 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1146 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1147 into individual cells.
1151 \begin_inset space ~
1156 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1157 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1161 \begin_layout Standard
1165 \begin_inset space ~
1170 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1172 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1187 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1188 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1189 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1195 \begin_inset space \space{}
1198 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1199 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1202 \begin_inset space ~
1205 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1215 \begin_inset space ~
1224 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1225 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1227 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1231 \begin_inset space ~
1236 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1237 start a new paragraph.
1238 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1239 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1247 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1261 \begin_inset space ~
1264 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1267 paste from the primary selection.
1268 This is normally the currently selected text.
1271 \begin_layout Standard
1274 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1280 \begin_inset space ~
1288 \begin_inset space ~
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1298 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1304 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1307 \begin_inset space ~
1316 \begin_inset space ~
1321 button to skip the current word.
1325 \begin_inset space ~
1330 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1334 \begin_inset space ~
1339 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1341 If the toggle is set, searching for
1342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1353 will not match the word
1354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 Match whole words only
1370 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1371 to only find complete words, e.
1372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1401 offers also an advanced
1404 \begin_inset space ~
1408 \begin_inset space ~
1413 feature that is described in sec.
1414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1420 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1427 \begin_layout Standard
1428 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1429 \begin_inset space \space{}
1433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1441 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1443 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1448 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1455 \begin_layout Standard
1459 arg "inset-select-all"
1462 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1463 When the cursor is inside an inset
1466 arg "inset-select-all"
1469 selects the content of the inset.
1473 arg "inset-select-all"
1476 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1481 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1484 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1488 \begin_layout Section
1490 \begin_inset Index idx
1493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1500 \begin_inset Index idx
1503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1512 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1519 \begin_layout Standard
1520 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1522 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1525 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1528 or the toolbar button
1534 to undo some mistake.
1535 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1537 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1540 or the toolbar button
1547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1554 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1558 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1561 \begin_layout Standard
1562 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1571 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1572 This is a consequence of the 100
1573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1576 step undo limit mentioned above.
1579 \begin_layout Standard
1588 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1590 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1594 \begin_layout Section
1596 \begin_inset Index idx
1599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1608 \begin_layout Standard
1609 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1612 \begin_layout Enumerate
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1622 once anywhere in the edit window.
1623 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1632 \begin_layout Itemize
1639 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1642 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1645 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1646 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1649 \begin_layout Itemize
1650 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1653 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1660 \begin_layout Enumerate
1661 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1665 \begin_layout Standard
1666 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1667 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1671 \begin_layout Section
1673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1675 name "sec:Navigating"
1680 \begin_inset Index idx
1683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1692 \begin_layout Standard
1694 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1697 \begin_layout Itemize
1702 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1703 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1706 \begin_layout Itemize
1707 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1709 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1711 \begin_inset space ~
1716 or by the toolbar button
1719 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1725 \begin_layout Itemize
1726 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1728 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1731 and use the same menu to return to them.
1732 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1735 \begin_layout Standard
1739 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1744 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1745 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1747 \begin_inset space ~
1752 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1753 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1754 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1755 your last editing position.
1758 \begin_layout Standard
1763 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1767 \begin_layout Subsection
1769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1771 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1778 \begin_layout Standard
1779 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1780 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1781 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1789 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1793 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1800 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1805 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1809 \begin_layout Standard
1810 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1811 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1812 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1813 dialog and to modify the citation.
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1817 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1819 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1820 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1828 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1831 \begin_layout Standard
1832 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1833 you further to control the display.
1838 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1839 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1845 option keeps it in the current view state.
1846 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1847 \begin_inset space ~
1850 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1851 \begin_inset space ~
1854 3, the subsections of sections
1855 \begin_inset space ~
1858 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1863 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1864 \begin_inset space ~
1868 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1878 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1881 \begin_layout Standard
1888 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1889 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1903 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1904 So, for example, you can move section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 \begin_inset space ~
1912 2.4 or after section
1913 \begin_inset space ~
1918 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1931 (or the corresponding key bindings
1939 ) you can change the level of sections.
1940 So you can for example make section
1941 \begin_inset space ~
1945 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_inset space ~
1955 \begin_layout Section
1956 Input/Word Completion
1957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1959 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1964 \begin_inset Index idx
1967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1974 \begin_inset Index idx
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2008 \begin_layout Standard
2010 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2012 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2013 is used to propose completions.
2016 \begin_layout Standard
2017 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2020 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2025 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2032 \begin_inset space ~
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2041 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2045 \begin_inset space ~
2050 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2051 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2055 \begin_inset space ~
2061 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2062 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2063 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2064 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2067 \begin_layout Standard
2069 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2070 completions available.
2075 key to accept a proposed completion.
2076 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2077 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2078 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2085 \begin_layout Standard
2086 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2087 ing options for text.
2088 The special math option
2092 enables characters to be composed.
2093 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2094 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2097 , you can then input the characters
2098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2109 to a formula to get it.
2110 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2111 of the math toolbar.
2112 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2116 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2117 's installation folder.
2118 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2127 \begin_layout Section
2129 \begin_inset Index idx
2132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2139 \begin_inset Index idx
2142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2171 \begin_inset Index idx
2174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2205 \begin_layout Standard
2206 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2220 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2223 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2227 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2234 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2241 \begin_layout Standard
2245 \begin_inset space ~
2253 \begin_inset space ~
2274 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2278 \begin_layout Labeling
2279 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2283 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2284 LatexCommand nomenclature
2286 description "Tabulator key"
2292 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2294 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2295 \begin_inset space ~
2299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2301 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2308 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2312 , especially section
2313 \begin_inset space ~
2317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2319 reference "subsec:Lists"
2325 If you are still confused, look in the
2330 \begin_inset Newline newline
2338 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2339 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2343 \begin_layout Labeling
2344 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2348 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2349 LatexCommand nomenclature
2351 description "Escape key"
2358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2365 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2366 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2369 \begin_layout Labeling
2370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2376 \begin_inset space ~
2380 \begin_inset space ~
2387 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2388 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2392 \begin_layout Standard
2393 There are three modifier keys:
2396 \begin_layout Labeling
2397 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2415 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2416 LatexCommand nomenclature
2418 description "Control key"
2422 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2423 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2427 \begin_layout Itemize
2436 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2439 \begin_layout Itemize
2448 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2451 \begin_layout Itemize
2460 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2464 \begin_layout Labeling
2465 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2483 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2484 LatexCommand nomenclature
2486 description "Shift key"
2490 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2491 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2494 \begin_layout Labeling
2495 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2513 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2514 LatexCommand nomenclature
2516 description "Alt or Meta key"
2520 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2521 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2522 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2528 \begin_inset Newline newline
2531 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2533 menu accelerator keys
2536 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2537 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2541 \begin_layout Standard
2542 For example, the sequence
2543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2559 \begin_inset space ~
2567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2586 \begin_inset space ~
2592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2602 \begin_layout Standard
2607 manual lists all other things bound to the
2615 \begin_layout Standard
2616 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2618 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2619 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2620 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2621 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2622 The \SpecialChar LyX
2623 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2624 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2625 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2627 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2643 followed by a capital
2650 \begin_layout Chapter
2653 \begin_inset Index idx
2656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2666 \begin_layout Section
2668 \begin_inset Index idx
2671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2680 \begin_layout Subsection
2684 \begin_layout Standard
2685 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2686 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2687 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2688 numbering schemes, and so on.
2689 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2690 and format the title of your document differently.
2693 \begin_layout Standard
2698 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2699 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2700 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2701 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2702 picks one for you by default.
2703 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2706 \begin_layout Subsection
2708 \begin_inset Index idx
2711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2720 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2727 \begin_layout Standard
2728 You can select a class using the
2730 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2731 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2735 \begin_inset Index idx
2738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2745 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2759 \begin_layout Description
2760 Article for basic articles
2763 \begin_layout Description
2764 Report for basic reports
2767 \begin_layout Description
2768 Book for writing a book
2771 \begin_layout Description
2772 Letter for US-style letters
2775 \begin_layout Standard
2776 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2777 only uses if you have installed
2778 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2779 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2780 distributions will include
2782 Here are some of the classes.
2783 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2785 Special Document Classes
2794 \begin_layout Description
2795 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2798 \begin_layout Description
2799 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2803 \begin_layout Description
2804 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2808 \begin_layout Description
2809 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2810 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2811 There are three article layouts available.
2812 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2813 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2814 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2815 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2820 sequential numbering
2821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2824 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2825 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2826 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2827 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2830 \begin_layout Description
2831 Beamer Layout for presentations
2834 \begin_layout Description
2835 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2836 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2837 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2838 with \SpecialChar LyX
2842 \begin_layout Description
2843 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2846 \begin_layout Description
2848 \begin_inset space ~
2851 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2858 \begin_layout Description
2859 Foils Used to make transparencies
2862 \begin_layout Description
2863 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2864 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2865 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2866 with \SpecialChar LyX
2870 \begin_layout Description
2871 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2872 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2875 \begin_layout Description
2876 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2879 \begin_layout Description
2880 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2883 \begin_layout Description
2884 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2885 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2886 (Is used by this document.)
2889 \begin_layout Description
2890 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2893 \begin_layout Description
2894 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2897 \begin_layout Description
2902 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2903 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2905 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2909 \begin_layout Description
2910 Slides Used to make transparencies
2913 \begin_layout Description
2915 \begin_inset space ~
2918 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2919 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2922 \begin_layout Description
2923 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2926 \begin_layout Standard
2927 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2929 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2935 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2936 of the document classes.
2939 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2943 \begin_layout Standard
2944 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2947 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2949 \begin_inset Index idx
2952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2969 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2970 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2972 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2975 \begin_layout Standard
2978 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2983 , are highly specialized.
2985 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
2986 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
2987 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2988 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2989 by some document class.
2990 There are just too many of them.
2991 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2994 \begin_layout Standard
2995 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3003 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3004 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3005 document class for a new file.
3007 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3012 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3021 manual for information on how to install them.
3022 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3028 \begin_layout Standard
3029 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3030 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3031 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3032 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3033 class files to be used for dissertation
3034 s submitted to those universities.
3035 The \SpecialChar LyX
3036 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3038 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3042 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3048 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3055 name "subsec:Modules"
3060 \begin_inset Index idx
3063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3074 chosen document class.
3075 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3076 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3087 \begin_inset Index idx
3090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3097 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3101 \begin_layout Standard
3102 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3103 packages or file format converters that are not always
3104 installed by default.
3106 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3107 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3108 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3109 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3111 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3112 file without the missing prerequisites.
3113 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3114 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3117 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3121 \begin_inset Index idx
3124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3125 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3135 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3144 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3147 \begin_layout Standard
3148 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3156 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3158 will advise you about these things.
3166 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3170 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3175 \begin_inset Index idx
3178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3179 Document ! Local Layout
3187 \begin_layout Standard
3188 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3189 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3190 : They are intended to be used in
3191 a variety of different documents.
3192 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3193 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3194 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3195 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3196 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3198 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3216 manual for information on how to use it.
3219 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3223 \begin_layout Standard
3224 Each class has a default set of options.
3225 Here's a quick table describing them:
3228 \begin_layout Standard
3229 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3235 \begin_layout Standard
3237 \begin_inset Tabular
3238 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3239 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3240 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3241 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3242 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3243 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3244 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3698 \begin_layout Standard
3699 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3705 \begin_layout Standard
3706 You're probably also wondering what
3707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3711 \begin_inset space ~
3715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3719 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3720 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3725 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3730 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3740 headings, there are also
3748 headings, and so on.
3749 We will describe these headings fully in section
3750 \begin_inset space ~
3754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3756 reference "subsec:Headings"
3763 \begin_layout Subsection
3765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3767 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3772 \begin_inset Index idx
3775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3782 \begin_inset Index idx
3785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3794 \begin_layout Standard
3795 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3797 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3804 \begin_inset space ~
3812 \begin_inset space ~
3817 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3819 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3820 doesn't support special options you want to
3821 use for your document.
3822 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3823 -class and its options, you have to read
3827 \begin_layout Standard
3831 \begin_inset space ~
3838 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3844 \begin_inset space ~
3849 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3850 You can choose between the following five options:
3853 \begin_layout Labeling
3854 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3859 Use default page style of current class.
3862 \begin_layout Labeling
3863 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3868 No page numbers or headings.
3871 \begin_layout Labeling
3872 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3880 \begin_layout Labeling
3881 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3886 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3887 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3888 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3889 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3892 \begin_layout Labeling
3893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3898 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3899 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3905 \begin_inset Index idx
3908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3910 -packages ! fancyhdr
3916 How they are defined is explained in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3930 \begin_layout Standard
3931 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3932 \begin_inset space ~
3936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3938 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3945 \begin_layout Subsection
3946 Paper Size and Orientation
3947 \begin_inset Index idx
3950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3951 Document ! Paper size
3957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3959 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3966 \begin_layout Standard
3967 You can find the following options in the menu
3970 \begin_inset space ~
3977 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3981 \begin_inset Index idx
3984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3993 \begin_layout Labeling
3994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4003 What size paper to print on.
4008 \begin_layout Itemize
4014 \begin_layout Itemize
4020 \begin_layout Itemize
4026 \begin_layout Itemize
4032 \begin_layout Itemize
4035 US letter, US legal, US executive
4038 \begin_layout Itemize
4044 \begin_layout Itemize
4051 \begin_layout Labeling
4052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4057 To choose whether to output as
4068 \begin_layout Labeling
4069 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4073 \begin_inset space ~
4078 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4079 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4082 \begin_layout Subsection
4084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4086 name "subsec:Margins"
4091 \begin_inset Index idx
4094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4101 \begin_inset Index idx
4104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4113 \begin_layout Standard
4114 Paper margins are set in the menu
4116 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4120 \begin_inset Index idx
4123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4132 \begin_layout Standard
4133 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4134 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4135 the paper format and the font size into account.
4138 \begin_layout Subsection
4142 \begin_layout Standard
4143 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4149 That includes the paragraph environments.
4150 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4151 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4152 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4154 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4163 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4165 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4166 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4167 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4170 \begin_layout Section
4171 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4172 \begin_inset Index idx
4175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4176 Paragraph ! Indentation
4184 \begin_layout Subsection
4186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4188 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4195 \begin_layout Standard
4196 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4197 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4200 \begin_layout Standard
4201 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4202 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4203 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4204 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4208 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4214 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4215 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4216 language than English.
4218 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4221 \begin_layout Standard
4222 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4223 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4224 into \SpecialChar LyX
4226 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4229 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4231 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4232 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4233 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4240 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4241 goes to produce a printable file.
4246 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4248 gives you the ability globally to change
4252 these pre-coded spacings.
4253 We will explain more later.
4256 \begin_layout Subsection
4257 Paragraph Separation
4258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4260 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4265 \begin_inset Index idx
4268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 Paragraph ! Separation
4277 \begin_layout Standard
4285 \begin_inset space ~
4293 \begin_inset space ~
4300 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4304 \begin_inset Index idx
4307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4313 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4316 \begin_layout Subsection
4320 \begin_layout Standard
4321 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4324 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4326 \begin_inset space ~
4331 dialog and toggle the
4334 \begin_inset space ~
4339 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4342 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4346 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4347 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4351 \begin_layout Standard
4352 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4353 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4356 \begin_layout Subsection
4358 \begin_inset Index idx
4361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4362 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4370 \begin_layout Standard
4373 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4377 \begin_inset Index idx
4380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4389 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4393 \begin_inset space ~
4402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4403 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4409 \begin_inset Index idx
4412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 -packages ! setspace
4419 installed to use this feature.
4424 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4426 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4428 \begin_inset space ~
4433 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4434 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4437 \begin_layout Section
4438 Paragraph Environments
4439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4441 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4446 \begin_inset Index idx
4449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4450 Paragraph ! Environments
4456 \begin_inset Index idx
4459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4460 Paragraph environments|(
4468 \begin_layout Subsection
4472 \begin_layout Standard
4473 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4476 \begin_layout Standard
4495 \begin_inset Newline newline
4498 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4500 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4501 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4502 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4511 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4514 \begin_layout Standard
4515 A paragraph environment is simply a
4516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4523 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4524 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4525 scheme, labels, and so on.
4526 Additionally, you can
4527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4534 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4535 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4536 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4537 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4539 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4541 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4544 \begin_layout Standard
4545 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4546 \begin_inset Graphics
4547 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4553 at the left end of the toolbar.
4555 will change the environment of the
4559 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4560 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4561 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4565 \begin_layout Standard
4574 create a new paragraph using the
4578 paragraph environment.
4580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4587 because if you are in one of these environments:
4590 \begin_layout Itemize
4596 \begin_layout Itemize
4602 \begin_layout Itemize
4608 \begin_layout Itemize
4614 \begin_layout Itemize
4620 \begin_layout Itemize
4626 \begin_layout Itemize
4632 \begin_layout Standard
4634 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4638 , rather than resetting it to
4643 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4644 \begin_inset space ~
4648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4650 reference "sec:Nesting"
4657 \begin_layout Subsection
4661 \begin_layout Standard
4662 The default paragraph environment is
4667 It creates a plain paragraph.
4669 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4670 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4671 this manual) are in the
4678 \begin_layout Standard
4679 You can nest a paragraph using the
4683 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4691 \begin_layout Subsection
4693 \begin_inset Index idx
4696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4705 \begin_layout Standard
4706 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4707 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4716 for thanks or contact information.
4717 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4718 places all of this on a separate page
4719 along with today's date.
4720 For other types of documents, the title
4721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4728 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4734 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4748 Here's how you use them:
4751 \begin_layout Itemize
4752 Put the title of your document in the
4759 \begin_layout Itemize
4760 Put the author name in the
4767 \begin_layout Itemize
4768 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4769 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4775 Note that using this environment is optional.
4776 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4777 will automatically insert today's date.
4778 If you don't want a date, use the option
4780 Suppress default date on front page
4784 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4785 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4787 \begin_inset space ~
4795 \begin_layout Standard
4796 You can use footnotes to insert
4797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4804 or contact information.
4807 \begin_layout Subsection
4809 \begin_inset Index idx
4812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4821 name "subsec:Headings"
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4831 takes care of the numbering for you.
4834 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4836 \begin_inset Index idx
4839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4840 Section headings ! Numbered
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4849 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4853 \begin_layout Enumerate
4859 \begin_layout Enumerate
4865 \begin_layout Enumerate
4871 \begin_layout Enumerate
4877 \begin_layout Enumerate
4883 \begin_layout Enumerate
4889 \begin_layout Enumerate
4895 \begin_layout Standard
4897 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4898 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4899 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4902 \begin_layout Standard
4903 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4904 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4905 You group the book into chapters.
4907 does a similar grouping:
4910 \begin_layout Itemize
4915 is divided into either
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4938 \begin_layout Itemize
4950 \begin_layout Itemize
4962 \begin_layout Itemize
4974 \begin_layout Itemize
4986 \begin_layout Standard
4987 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4995 Not all document types use the
4999 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5004 is the top-level heading.
5012 \begin_layout Standard
5017 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5018 labels it with its number,
5019 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5021 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5035 \begin_inset Index idx
5038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5039 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5048 The unnumbered section headings have a
5049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5056 at the end of their name.
5057 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5058 the table of contents, see section
5059 \begin_inset space ~
5063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5072 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5073 Changing the Numbering
5074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5076 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5083 \begin_layout Standard
5084 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5085 in the Table of Contents.
5086 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5088 Just as certain classes start with
5102 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5112 This is something you can change.
5115 \begin_layout Standard
5118 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5122 \begin_inset Index idx
5125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5134 \begin_inset space ~
5138 \begin_inset space ~
5143 you will see two counters.
5148 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5149 numbers a section heading.
5150 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5155 Short Titles of Headings
5156 \begin_inset Index idx
5159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5160 Section headings ! Short titles
5166 \begin_inset Argument 1
5169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5178 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5185 \begin_layout Standard
5186 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5187 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5188 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5189 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5192 \begin_layout Standard
5194 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5195 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5196 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5197 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5202 \begin_inset space ~
5208 This will insert a box labeled
5209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5213 \begin_inset space ~
5217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5220 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5221 This also works for captions inside floats.
5222 There can only be one short title per title.
5225 \begin_layout Standard
5226 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5229 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5233 \begin_layout Standard
5234 The following information applies to all section headings:
5237 \begin_layout Itemize
5238 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5241 \begin_layout Itemize
5242 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5245 \begin_layout Itemize
5246 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5249 \begin_layout Itemize
5250 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5253 \begin_layout Subsection
5257 \begin_layout Standard
5259 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5273 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5274 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5275 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5276 the text they contain.
5277 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5285 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5288 \begin_layout Standard
5289 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5298 when you start a new paragraph.
5299 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5303 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5304 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5305 have to change back to the
5309 environment yourself.
5312 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5321 \begin_inset Index idx
5324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5333 \begin_layout Standard
5334 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5335 time for the differences.
5344 are identical except for one difference:
5348 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5357 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5361 Here's an example of the
5374 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5376 See – no indentation!
5380 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5381 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5382 the other paragraph.
5385 \begin_layout Standard
5386 Here's another example, this time in the
5393 \begin_layout Quotation
5399 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5400 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5401 the first line, then
5405 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5409 you were quoting other text.
5412 \begin_layout Quotation
5413 Here's a new paragraph.
5414 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5415 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5418 \begin_layout Standard
5419 As the examples show,
5423 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5424 They should put quotes in the
5429 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5433 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5436 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5438 \begin_inset Index idx
5441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5448 \begin_inset Index idx
5451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5467 \begin_layout Standard
5472 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5478 \begin_inset Newline newline
5481 Which I did not rehearse!
5485 It could be much worse.
5486 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5488 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5489 indented a bit more than the first.
5490 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5496 \begin_inset Newline newline
5499 And make things look fine
5500 \begin_inset Newline newline
5506 arg "newline-insert newline"
5512 \begin_layout Standard
5517 does not indent both margins.
5518 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5519 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5522 arg "newline-insert newline"
5528 \begin_layout Subsection
5530 \begin_inset Index idx
5533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5549 \begin_layout Standard
5551 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5561 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5562 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5571 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5572 lets you provide your own label.
5573 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5574 describing some general features of all four of them.
5577 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5581 \begin_layout Standard
5582 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5584 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5585 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5594 reset the environment to
5598 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5599 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5600 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5608 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5615 \begin_layout Standard
5616 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5617 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5618 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5620 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5621 you read all of section
5622 \begin_inset space ~
5626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5628 reference "sec:Nesting"
5635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5637 \begin_inset Index idx
5640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5656 \begin_layout Standard
5657 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5661 paragraph environment.
5662 It has the following properties:
5665 \begin_layout Itemize
5666 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5670 \begin_layout Itemize
5672 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5675 \begin_layout Itemize
5676 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5680 \begin_layout Itemize
5681 The items can have any length.
5683 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5684 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5691 \begin_layout Itemize
5696 environment inside another
5700 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5704 \begin_layout Itemize
5705 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5708 \begin_layout Itemize
5710 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5713 \begin_layout Itemize
5715 \begin_inset space ~
5719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5721 reference "sec:Nesting"
5725 for a full explanation of nesting.
5729 \begin_layout Standard
5730 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5739 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5742 \begin_layout Standard
5743 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5744 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5747 \begin_layout Itemize
5748 The label for the first level
5752 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5756 \begin_layout Itemize
5757 The label for the second level is a dash.
5761 \begin_layout Itemize
5762 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5766 \begin_layout Itemize
5767 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5771 \begin_layout Itemize
5772 Back out to the third level.
5776 \begin_layout Itemize
5777 Back to the second level.
5781 \begin_layout Itemize
5782 Back to the outermost level.
5785 \begin_layout Standard
5786 These are the default labels for an
5791 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5793 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5796 dialog in the submenu
5801 \begin_inset Index idx
5804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5810 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5814 \begin_layout Standard
5815 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5816 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5818 \begin_inset space ~
5822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5824 reference "sec:Nesting"
5831 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5833 \begin_inset Index idx
5836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5845 name "sec:Enumerate"
5852 \begin_layout Standard
5857 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5858 It has these properties:
5861 \begin_layout Enumerate
5862 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5866 \begin_layout Enumerate
5867 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5871 \begin_layout Enumerate
5873 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5876 \begin_layout Enumerate
5881 environment resets the counter to one.
5884 \begin_layout Enumerate
5897 \begin_layout Enumerate
5898 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5899 Items can have any length.
5902 \begin_layout Enumerate
5903 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5906 \begin_layout Enumerate
5907 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5910 \begin_layout Enumerate
5911 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5915 \begin_layout Standard
5924 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5926 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5927 labels the four different levels in an
5934 \begin_layout Enumerate
5935 The first level of an
5939 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5943 \begin_layout Enumerate
5944 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5948 \begin_layout Enumerate
5949 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5953 \begin_layout Enumerate
5954 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5957 \begin_layout Enumerate
5958 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5963 \begin_layout Enumerate
5964 Back to the third level
5968 \begin_layout Enumerate
5969 Back to the second level.
5973 \begin_layout Enumerate
5974 Back to the outermost level.
5977 \begin_layout Standard
5978 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5982 environment, see section
5983 \begin_inset space ~
5987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5989 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
5994 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
5998 \begin_layout Standard
5999 There is more to nesting
6003 environments than we've stated here.
6004 You should read section
6005 \begin_inset space ~
6009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6011 reference "sec:Nesting"
6015 to learn more about nesting.
6018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6020 \begin_inset Index idx
6023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6032 \begin_layout Standard
6033 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6037 list has no fixed label.
6038 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6047 of the first line as the label.
6051 \begin_layout Description
6052 Example: This is an example of the
6059 \begin_layout Standard
6061 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6065 \begin_layout Standard
6067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6074 it is meant that the first usage of the
6078 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6080 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6088 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6093 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6094 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6096 \begin_inset space ~
6102 \begin_inset space ~
6106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6108 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6112 for more information.) Here is an example:
6115 \begin_layout Description
6117 \begin_inset space ~
6120 Example: This one shows how to use a
6123 \begin_inset space ~
6135 \begin_layout Description
6136 Usage: You should use the
6140 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6141 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6143 It's not a good idea to use a
6147 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6148 You're better off using
6160 paragraphs into them.
6163 \begin_layout Description
6164 Nesting: You can nest
6168 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6172 \begin_layout Standard
6173 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6174 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6175 them from the first line.
6178 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6180 \begin_inset Index idx
6183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6192 \begin_layout Standard
6197 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6198 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6202 \begin_layout Standard
6211 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6213 Here are its properties:
6216 \begin_layout Labeling
6217 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6219 \begin_inset space ~
6222 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6231 of each line as the item label.
6236 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6237 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6238 space as described above.
6241 \begin_layout Labeling
6242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6243 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6244 uses different margins for the item label and the
6245 body of the item text.
6246 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6247 label width plus a little extra space.
6251 \begin_layout Labeling
6252 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6254 \begin_inset space ~
6257 width \SpecialChar LyX
6258 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6259 If the label width is larger, the label
6260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6267 into the first line.
6268 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6269 margin of the rest of the item text.
6272 \begin_layout Labeling
6273 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6275 \begin_inset space ~
6278 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6283 environment has the same left margin.
6284 \begin_inset Newline newline
6287 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6290 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6292 \begin_inset space ~
6297 dialog (toolbar button
6300 arg "layout-paragraph"
6307 \begin_inset space ~
6312 determines the default label width.
6313 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6322 multiple times instead.
6323 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6333 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6336 \begin_inset space ~
6341 every time you alter a label in a
6346 \begin_inset Newline newline
6349 The predefined default width is the length of
6350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6358 \begin_inset space ~
6364 \begin_layout Standard
6369 list the same way as the
6373 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6379 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6383 \begin_layout Standard
6388 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6389 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6391 \begin_inset space ~
6395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6397 reference "sec:Nesting"
6401 to learn about nesting.
6404 \begin_layout Standard
6405 There is yet another feature of the
6409 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6410 left-justifies the item labels by
6412 You can use additional
6416 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6417 justifies the item label.
6422 are documented in section
6423 \begin_inset space ~
6427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6429 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6434 Here are some examples:
6437 \begin_layout Labeling
6438 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6439 Left The default for
6446 \begin_layout Labeling
6447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6448 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6455 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6458 \begin_layout Labeling
6459 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6460 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6464 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6471 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6474 \begin_layout Subsection
6476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6478 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6483 \begin_inset Index idx
6486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6495 \begin_layout Standard
6496 The features described in this section require that the module
6498 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6500 is loaded in the document settings.
6501 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6507 \begin_inset Index idx
6510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6512 -packages ! enumitem
6520 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6521 Custom Enumerate Lists
6522 \begin_inset Index idx
6525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6526 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6534 \begin_layout Standard
6536 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6542 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6543 There you add the command
6546 \begin_layout Standard
6554 \begin_layout Standard
6566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6567 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6568 Code, look at section
6569 \begin_inset space ~
6573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6575 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6588 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6595 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6596 For capital Roman numerals replace
6608 in the command above.
6609 For Arabic numerals use
6617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6624 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6639 \begin_layout Standard
6641 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6649 You can only number 26
6650 \begin_inset space ~
6653 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6661 \begin_layout Standard
6662 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6663 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6666 \begin_layout Standard
6667 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6670 \begin_layout Enumerate
6671 \begin_inset Argument 1
6674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6700 \begin_layout Enumerate
6701 \begin_inset Argument 1
6704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6727 \begin_layout Enumerate
6732 \begin_layout Enumerate
6733 \begin_inset Argument 1
6736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6760 \begin_layout Enumerate
6761 \begin_inset Argument 1
6764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6790 \begin_layout Standard
6791 For this list these commands were used:
6794 \begin_layout Standard
6805 \begin_inset Newline newline
6813 \begin_inset Newline newline
6821 \begin_inset Newline newline
6831 \begin_layout Standard
6838 makes the label emphasized and
6847 \begin_layout Standard
6848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6856 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6857 lists until you change the definition.
6865 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6867 \begin_inset Index idx
6870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6871 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6879 \begin_layout Standard
6880 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6883 \begin_layout Enumerate
6884 \begin_inset Argument 1
6887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6906 \begin_inset Note Note
6909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6910 goes back to default numbering
6918 \begin_layout Enumerate
6922 \begin_layout Standard
6926 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6930 \begin_layout Standard
6931 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6936 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6937 to indicate that it is a resumed
6938 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6939 , but in the output.
6942 \begin_layout Standard
6943 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6951 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6960 \begin_layout Standard
6961 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6963 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6964 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6965 of a normal enumeration.
6966 There, insert the command
6969 \begin_layout Standard
6975 \begin_layout Standard
6980 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6984 \begin_layout Enumerate
6988 \begin_layout Enumerate
6992 \begin_layout Standard
6993 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6996 \begin_layout Enumerate
6997 \begin_inset Argument 1
7000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7016 This enumeration starts at 4
7019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7021 \begin_inset Index idx
7024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7033 \begin_layout Standard
7034 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7036 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7039 \begin_layout Itemize
7043 \begin_layout Itemize
7044 with standard spacing
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7048 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7050 Add there the command
7054 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7057 \begin_layout Itemize
7058 \begin_inset Argument 1
7061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 \begin_layout Itemize
7084 \begin_layout Itemize
7088 \begin_layout Standard
7089 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7096 \begin_inset Index idx
7099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7101 -packages ! enumitem
7107 For more information see its documentation,
7108 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7117 \begin_layout Standard
7118 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7120 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7121 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7125 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7128 \begin_layout Enumerate
7129 \begin_inset Argument 1
7132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7140 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7153 \begin_layout Enumerate
7154 with negative indentation
7157 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7158 Further Customization
7159 \begin_inset Index idx
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7163 Lists ! Customization
7171 \begin_layout Standard
7172 You can also change the style of description lists.
7176 \begin_layout Standard
7182 \begin_layout Standard
7183 changes the description label font, the command
7186 \begin_layout Standard
7192 \begin_layout Standard
7193 sets the list style.
7196 \begin_layout Standard
7197 An example where the command
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7205 itshape, style=nextline
7208 \begin_layout Standard
7212 \begin_layout Description
7214 \begin_inset space ~
7218 \begin_inset Argument 1
7221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7227 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7229 itshape, style=nextline
7239 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7240 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7244 \begin_layout Description
7246 \begin_inset space ~
7249 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7250 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7251 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7254 \begin_layout Standard
7255 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7261 \begin_inset Index idx
7264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7266 -packages ! enumitem
7272 For more information see its documentation
7273 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7282 \begin_layout Subsection
7284 \begin_inset Index idx
7287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7296 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7298 \begin_inset space ~
7301 Address: An Overview
7304 \begin_layout Standard
7305 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7306 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7314 \begin_inset space ~
7320 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7321 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7322 gags on the document.
7323 In contrast, you can use the
7330 \begin_inset space ~
7335 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7336 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 Of course, you're not limited to using
7348 \begin_inset space ~
7357 \begin_inset space ~
7362 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7363 some European academic papers.
7366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7370 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7382 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7383 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7387 \begin_inset space ~
7392 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7393 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7394 Here's an example of each:
7397 \begin_layout Right Address
7399 \begin_inset Newline newline
7403 \begin_inset Newline newline
7407 \begin_inset Newline newline
7410 When is it? What is today?
7413 \begin_layout Standard
7417 \begin_inset space ~
7423 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7425 the largest block of text on a single line.
7426 Here's an example of the
7433 \begin_layout Address
7435 \begin_inset Newline newline
7438 Where do I send this
7439 \begin_inset Newline newline
7442 Your post office and country
7445 \begin_layout Standard
7446 As you can see, both
7453 \begin_inset space ~
7458 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7463 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7464 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7470 This makes sense, since
7478 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7479 Thus, you have to use
7486 arg "newline-insert newline"
7491 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7492 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7494 \begin_inset space ~
7498 \begin_inset space ~
7503 ) to start a new line in an
7510 \begin_inset space ~
7518 \begin_layout Subsection
7522 \begin_layout Standard
7523 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7524 or list of references.
7526 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7529 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7531 \begin_inset Index idx
7534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7543 \begin_layout Standard
7548 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7549 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7550 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7551 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7565 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7566 The book document classes ignores the
7570 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7574 in a letter document class.
7577 \begin_layout Standard
7582 environment does several things for you.
7583 First, it puts the centered label
7584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7592 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7594 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7595 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7596 the subsequent text.
7597 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7599 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7603 \begin_layout Standard
7604 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7608 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7609 The new paragraph will still be in the
7614 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7615 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7618 \begin_layout Standard
7619 \begin_inset Float figure
7624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7626 \begin_inset Graphics
7627 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7635 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7640 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7661 \begin_layout Standard
7662 We would love to demonstrate the
7666 environment, but since this document is in the
7667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7674 class, we can't do this.
7675 We inserted it therefore as figure
7676 \begin_inset space ~
7680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7682 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7687 If you have never heard of an
7688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7695 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7712 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7719 \begin_layout Standard
7724 environment is used to list references.
7725 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7726 only use it at the end of the document.
7738 \begin_layout Standard
7739 When you first open a
7743 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7744 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7760 depending on the document class.
7761 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7762 Each paragraph of the
7766 environment is a bibliography entry.
7771 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7772 Each new paragraph is still in the
7779 \begin_layout Standard
7780 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7781 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7783 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7785 handling, have a look at section
7786 \begin_inset space ~
7790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7792 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7799 \begin_layout Subsection
7800 Special Environments
7803 \begin_layout Standard
7805 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7806 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7809 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7814 \begin_inset Index idx
7817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7827 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7834 \begin_layout Standard
7840 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7842 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7847 key as a fixed whitespace.
7851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7864 \begin_inset space ~
7869 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7887 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7890 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7893 arg "newline-insert newline"
7910 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7911 So, when you finish using the
7916 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7917 Also, you can nest the
7922 environment inside of others.
7925 \begin_layout Standard
7926 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7929 \begin_layout Itemize
7933 arg "newline-insert newline"
7936 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7941 \begin_inset space \space{}
7951 arg "newline-insert newline"
7957 \begin_layout Itemize
7961 arg "newline-insert newline"
7971 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7977 \begin_layout Itemize
7978 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7979 You must put at least one
7983 in any line you want blank.
7984 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
7988 \begin_layout Itemize
7989 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7993 since that will insert
7998 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8001 arg "self-insert \""
8007 \begin_layout Standard
8011 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8015 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8019 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8023 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8027 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8028 printf("Hello World!
8033 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8037 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8041 \begin_layout Standard
8042 This is just the standard
8043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8054 \begin_layout Standard
8060 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8062 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8063 as if you used a typewriter.
8064 \begin_inset Index idx
8067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8068 Paragraph environments|)
8073 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8076 Program Code Listings
8081 \begin_inset space ~
8089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8093 \begin_inset Index idx
8096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8105 \begin_layout Standard
8110 environment is similar to the
8115 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8116 computer console text.
8121 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8135 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8136 you can have empty lines.
8149 \begin_layout Itemize
8150 have a certain language and a text style
8153 \begin_layout Itemize
8154 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8155 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8156 and \SpecialChar TeX
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8161 Because of these properties
8165 works like a typewriter.
8169 \begin_layout Verbatim
8173 \begin_layout Verbatim
8176 The following 2 lines are empty:
8179 \begin_layout Verbatim
8183 \begin_layout Verbatim
8187 \begin_layout Verbatim
8188 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8193 \begin_layout Standard
8198 environment is identical to
8202 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8203 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8210 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8214 \begin_layout Section
8215 Nesting Environments
8216 \begin_inset Index idx
8219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8220 Nesting ! Environments
8226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8235 \begin_layout Subsection
8239 \begin_layout Standard
8241 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8243 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8245 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8247 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8259 \begin_layout Enumerate
8263 \begin_layout Enumerate
8268 \begin_layout Enumerate
8272 \begin_layout Enumerate
8277 \begin_layout Enumerate
8281 \begin_layout Standard
8282 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8283 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8285 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8287 \begin_inset space ~
8291 \begin_inset space ~
8299 \begin_inset space ~
8303 \begin_inset space ~
8308 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8310 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8313 arg "depth-increment"
8319 arg "depth-decrement"
8333 arg "depth-increment"
8339 arg "depth-decrement"
8343 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8344 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8348 \begin_layout Standard
8349 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8350 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8351 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8352 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8353 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8356 \begin_layout Standard
8357 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8359 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8361 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8364 \begin_layout Subsection
8365 What You Can and Can't Nest
8368 \begin_layout Standard
8369 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8370 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8373 \begin_layout Standard
8374 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8375 than a simple yes or no.
8376 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8379 \begin_layout Itemize
8380 Completely unnestable
8383 \begin_layout Itemize
8384 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8388 \begin_layout Itemize
8389 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8393 \begin_layout Standard
8394 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8395 environments have them:
8398 \begin_layout Description
8399 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8400 Can't nest into them.
8404 \begin_layout Itemize
8410 \begin_layout Itemize
8416 \begin_layout Itemize
8422 \begin_layout Itemize
8428 \begin_layout Itemize
8435 \begin_layout Description
8437 \begin_inset space ~
8440 Nestable You can nest them.
8441 You can nest other things into them.
8445 \begin_layout Itemize
8451 \begin_layout Itemize
8457 \begin_layout Itemize
8463 \begin_layout Itemize
8469 \begin_layout Itemize
8475 \begin_layout Itemize
8481 \begin_layout Itemize
8487 \begin_layout Itemize
8494 \begin_layout Itemize
8500 \begin_layout Itemize
8507 \begin_layout Description
8508 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8509 You can't nest anything into them.
8513 \begin_layout Itemize
8519 \begin_layout Itemize
8525 \begin_layout Itemize
8531 \begin_layout Itemize
8537 \begin_layout Itemize
8543 \begin_layout Itemize
8549 \begin_layout Itemize
8555 \begin_layout Itemize
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8567 \begin_layout Itemize
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8591 \begin_layout Itemize
8595 \begin_inset space ~
8601 \begin_layout Itemize
8608 \begin_layout Standard
8609 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8617 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8627 \begin_inset space ~
8630 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8631 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8632 nested section headings violate this.
8640 \begin_layout Subsection
8641 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8642 \begin_inset Index idx
8645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8646 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8654 \begin_layout Standard
8655 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8656 affected by nesting anyhow.
8660 \begin_layout Itemize
8664 \begin_layout Itemize
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8672 \begin_layout Standard
8674 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8682 Figures and tables in
8686 are not affected by this.
8691 Have a look at section
8692 \begin_inset space ~
8696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8698 reference "sec:Floats"
8702 for more information about
8709 \begin_layout Standard
8711 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8712 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8716 \begin_layout Standard
8717 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8725 of its own, it behaves just like a
8726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8733 paragraph environment.
8734 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8738 \begin_layout Standard
8739 Here's an example with a table:
8742 \begin_layout Enumerate
8747 \begin_layout Enumerate
8748 This is (a) and it's nested.
8752 \begin_layout Standard
8753 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8759 \begin_layout Standard
8761 \begin_inset Tabular
8762 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8763 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8764 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8765 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8849 \begin_layout Standard
8850 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8857 \begin_layout Enumerate
8859 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8863 \begin_layout Enumerate
8867 \begin_layout Standard
8868 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8871 \begin_layout Enumerate
8876 \begin_layout Enumerate
8877 This is (a) and it's nested.
8881 \begin_layout Standard
8882 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8888 \begin_layout Standard
8890 \begin_inset Tabular
8891 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8892 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8893 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8894 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8978 \begin_layout Standard
8979 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8985 \begin_layout Enumerate
8992 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8995 \begin_layout Enumerate
8999 \begin_layout Standard
9000 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9004 \begin_layout Standard
9005 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9008 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9011 \begin_layout Enumerate
9016 \begin_layout Enumerate
9017 This is (a) and it's nested.
9020 \begin_layout Standard
9021 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9027 \begin_layout Standard
9029 \begin_inset Tabular
9030 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9031 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9032 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9033 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9118 \begin_layout Standard
9119 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9125 \begin_layout Enumerate
9127 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9134 \begin_layout Enumerate
9138 \begin_layout Standard
9139 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9145 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9146 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9150 \begin_layout Subsection
9151 Usage and General Features
9154 \begin_layout Standard
9155 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9156 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9165 is the innermost possible depth.
9166 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9169 \begin_layout Enumerate
9170 level #1 – outermost
9174 \begin_layout Enumerate
9179 \begin_layout Enumerate
9184 \begin_layout Enumerate
9189 \begin_layout Itemize
9194 \begin_layout Itemize
9203 \begin_layout Standard
9204 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9205 both of them in the example.
9206 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9216 For example, if we tried to nest another
9221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9228 , we would get errors.
9231 \begin_layout Subsection
9233 \begin_inset Index idx
9236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9245 \begin_layout Standard
9246 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9247 We have several examples of nested environments.
9248 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9252 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9253 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9256 \begin_layout Labeling
9257 \labelwidthstring MMM
9258 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9267 \begin_layout Labeling
9268 \labelwidthstring MMM
9269 #2-a This is level #2.
9270 We created it by using
9273 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9279 arg "depth-increment"
9286 \begin_layout Labeling
9287 \labelwidthstring MMM
9288 #3-a This is level #3.
9289 This time, we just enter
9296 arg "depth-increment"
9300 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9304 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9310 arg "depth-increment"
9317 \begin_layout Standard
9322 environment, nested inside of
9323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9331 So, it's at level #4.
9332 We did this by entering
9335 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9341 arg "depth-increment"
9344 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9349 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9365 \begin_layout Standard
9370 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9373 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9379 \begin_layout Labeling
9380 \labelwidthstring MMM
9381 #4-a This is level #4.
9385 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9388 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9393 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9397 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9402 keep nesting things inside
9403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9414 \begin_layout Labeling
9415 \labelwidthstring MMM
9416 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9421 \begin_layout Labeling
9422 \labelwidthstring MMM
9423 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9424 and this is level #6.
9425 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9429 \begin_layout Labeling
9430 \labelwidthstring MMM
9431 #5-b Back to level #5.
9435 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9441 arg "depth-decrement"
9448 \begin_layout Labeling
9449 \labelwidthstring MMM
9453 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9459 arg "depth-decrement"
9462 , we're back at level #4.
9466 \begin_layout Labeling
9467 \labelwidthstring MMM
9468 #3-b Back to level #3.
9469 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9473 \begin_layout Labeling
9474 \labelwidthstring MMM
9475 #2-b Back to level #2.
9480 \begin_layout Labeling
9481 \labelwidthstring MMM
9482 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9483 After this sentence, we will enter
9487 and change the paragraph environment back to
9494 \begin_layout Standard
9495 We could have also used the
9511 environment in place of the
9516 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9520 Example 2: Inheritance
9523 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9524 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9527 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9536 arg "depth-increment"
9540 \begin_inset Newline newline
9543 which, we will change to the
9551 \begin_layout Enumerate
9556 environment, at level #2.
9559 \begin_layout Enumerate
9560 Notice how the nested
9564 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9568 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9572 \begin_layout Standard
9573 We ended this example by entering
9578 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9582 and reset the nesting depth by using
9585 arg "depth-decrement"
9591 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9592 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9601 \begin_inset Argument 1
9604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9605 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9613 \begin_layout Enumerate
9614 This is level #1, in an
9618 paragraph environment.
9619 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9623 \begin_layout Enumerate
9628 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9634 arg "depth-increment"
9638 Now, what happens if we nest an
9642 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9643 label be? An asterisk?
9647 \begin_layout Itemize
9657 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9658 So, its label is a bullet.
9659 (We got here by using
9662 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9668 arg "depth-increment"
9671 , then changing the environment to
9679 \begin_layout Itemize
9680 Here's level #4, produced using
9683 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9689 arg "depth-increment"
9693 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9698 \begin_layout Enumerate
9701 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9706 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9710 , because we are in the
9718 environment (that is, it is an
9733 \begin_layout Enumerate
9738 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9739 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9743 \begin_layout Enumerate
9744 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9747 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9750 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9753 \begin_layout Enumerate
9757 arg "depth-decrement"
9760 to decrease the depth after the next
9763 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9770 \begin_layout Enumerate
9772 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9777 \begin_layout Enumerate
9779 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9780 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9784 \begin_layout Enumerate
9785 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9794 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9799 reset the counter for the label.
9803 \begin_layout Enumerate
9807 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9813 arg "depth-decrement"
9816 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9817 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9818 into the twofold-nested
9826 \begin_layout Enumerate
9827 The same thing happens if we do another
9830 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9836 arg "depth-decrement"
9839 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9842 \begin_layout Standard
9843 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9848 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9863 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9870 The same rule applies for the
9874 environment, as well.
9877 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9878 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9881 \begin_layout Enumerate
9882 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9883 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9884 the same detail with how we did it.
9893 \begin_layout Standard
9901 arg "depth-increment"
9908 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9909 the example in parentheses someplace.
9910 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9911 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9912 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9916 \begin_layout Enumerate
9921 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9926 Now we will add verse.
9927 \begin_inset Newline newline
9930 It will get much worse.
9931 \begin_inset Newline newline
9941 arg "depth-increment"
9952 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9953 \begin_inset Newline newline
9956 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9957 \begin_inset Newline newline
9963 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9976 \begin_layout Standard
9977 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9983 \begin_layout Standard
9985 \begin_inset Tabular
9986 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9987 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9988 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9989 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10074 \begin_layout Verse
10078 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10088 arg "depth-increment"
10094 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10108 arg "depth-decrement"
10115 \begin_layout Enumerate
10120 : level #1) This is another item.
10121 Note that selecting a
10125 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10126 3 times to put the table inside the
10134 \begin_layout Quotation
10135 We're now ending the
10139 list and changing to
10144 We're still at level #1.
10145 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10146 The next set of paragraphs is a
10147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10154 We will nest both the
10161 \begin_inset space ~
10166 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10170 for the letter body.
10174 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10177 to preserve the depth.
10178 Remember that you need to use
10181 arg "newline-insert newline"
10184 to create multiple lines inside the
10191 \begin_inset space ~
10201 \begin_layout Right Address
10203 \begin_inset Newline newline
10206 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10207 \begin_inset Newline newline
10213 \begin_layout Address
10215 \begin_inset space ~
10221 \begin_layout Quotation
10222 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10226 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10227 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10228 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10229 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10230 as soon as possible.
10231 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10234 \begin_layout Quotation
10235 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10236 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10237 with your order, along with payment.
10240 \begin_layout Quotation
10241 We thank you again for your patience.
10244 \begin_layout Address
10246 \begin_inset Newline newline
10253 \begin_layout Quotation
10254 That ends that example!
10257 \begin_layout Standard
10258 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10259 gives you a lot of power with just
10261 We could have easily nested an
10282 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10285 \begin_layout Subsection
10287 \begin_inset Index idx
10290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10291 Nesting ! Separation
10297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10299 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10306 \begin_layout Standard
10307 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10309 For example you need two different enumerations:
10312 \begin_layout Enumerate
10317 \begin_layout Enumerate
10322 \begin_layout Enumerate
10326 \begin_layout Standard
10327 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10333 \begin_layout Itemize
10339 \begin_layout Standard
10340 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10346 \begin_layout Enumerate
10350 \begin_layout Enumerate
10354 \begin_layout Enumerate
10358 \begin_layout Standard
10359 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10360 list item and use the menu
10362 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10363 Start New Environment
10366 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10368 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10371 arg "paragraph-break"
10375 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10376 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10377 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10378 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10381 \begin_layout Standard
10382 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10385 arg "paragraph-break"
10388 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10391 \begin_layout Section
10392 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10393 \begin_inset Index idx
10396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10405 \begin_layout Standard
10406 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10407 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10409 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10410 be broken at the end of a line.
10411 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10415 \begin_layout Subsection
10417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10419 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10424 \begin_inset Index idx
10427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10436 \begin_layout Standard
10437 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10438 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10439 ) not to break the line at
10441 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10444 \begin_layout Quote
10445 Further documentation is given in section
10446 \begin_inset Newline newline
10450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10452 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10460 \begin_layout Standard
10461 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10476 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10485 A protected space is set with
10487 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10488 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10490 \begin_inset space ~
10498 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10504 \begin_layout Subsection
10506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10508 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10513 \begin_inset Index idx
10516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10517 Spacing ! Horizontal
10525 \begin_layout Standard
10526 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10528 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10529 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10533 The length units are listed in Appendix
10534 \begin_inset space ~
10538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10540 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10547 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10551 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10556 \begin_inset Index idx
10559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10560 Spaces ! Inter-word
10568 \begin_layout Standard
10569 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10570 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10571 at the ends of sentences.
10572 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10573 automatically takes care about this.
10574 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10575 followed by a period; see section
10576 \begin_inset space ~
10580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10582 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10587 To insert a normal space, select
10589 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10590 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10592 \begin_inset space ~
10600 arg "space-insert normal"
10606 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10610 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10615 \begin_inset Index idx
10618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10627 \begin_layout Standard
10629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10636 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10645 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10646 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10647 inside abbreviations:
10650 \begin_layout Quote
10652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10656 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10659 \begin_layout Standard
10660 or between values and units.
10661 Compare for example this:
10662 \begin_inset Newline newline
10666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10670 \begin_inset Newline newline
10673 10 kg (normal space
10676 \begin_layout Standard
10677 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10680 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10682 \begin_inset space ~
10690 arg "space-insert thin"
10696 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10700 \begin_layout Standard
10701 You can also insert the following space types:
10704 \begin_layout Description
10706 \begin_inset space ~
10710 \begin_inset space ~
10713 space A line with a
10714 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10718 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10722 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10725 negative thin space between the arrows.
10728 \begin_layout Description
10730 \begin_inset space ~
10734 \begin_inset space ~
10737 space A line with a
10738 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10742 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10746 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10749 negative medium space between the arrows.
10752 \begin_layout Description
10754 \begin_inset space ~
10758 \begin_inset space ~
10761 space A line with a
10762 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10766 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10770 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10773 negative thick space between the arrows.
10776 \begin_layout Description
10778 \begin_inset space ~
10782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10786 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10790 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10794 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10798 \begin_inset space ~
10802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10805 em) space between the arrows.
10808 \begin_layout Description
10810 \begin_inset space ~
10814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10818 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10822 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10826 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10830 \begin_inset space ~
10834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10837 em) space between the arrows.
10840 \begin_layout Description
10842 \begin_inset space ~
10846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10850 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10854 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10858 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10862 \begin_inset space ~
10866 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10869 em) space between the arrows.
10872 \begin_layout Description
10874 \begin_inset space ~
10878 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10882 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10887 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10891 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10894 cm space between the arrows.
10897 \begin_layout Standard
10899 \begin_inset space ~
10903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10905 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10909 lists the different space sizes.
10912 \begin_layout Standard
10913 \begin_inset Float table
10918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10919 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10922 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10924 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10928 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10938 \begin_inset Tabular
10939 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10940 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10941 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10942 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11058 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11153 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11181 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11215 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11217 \begin_inset Index idx
11220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11229 \begin_layout Standard
11230 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11231 feature for adding extra space
11232 in a uniform fashion.
11233 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11234 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11235 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11236 equally between themselves.
11239 \begin_layout Standard
11240 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11243 \begin_layout Quote
11245 This is on the left side
11246 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11249 This is on the right
11252 \begin_layout Quote
11255 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11259 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11265 \begin_layout Quote
11268 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11272 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11276 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11282 \begin_layout Standard
11283 That was an example in the
11289 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11293 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11297 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11300 is one in a standard paragraph.
11301 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11305 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11308 \begin_layout Standard
11309 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11312 \begin_inset space ~
11317 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11320 \begin_layout Standard
11322 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11326 \begin_inset space ~
11332 \begin_layout Standard
11334 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11338 \begin_inset space ~
11344 \begin_layout Standard
11346 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11350 \begin_inset space ~
11356 \begin_layout Standard
11358 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11362 \begin_inset space ~
11368 \begin_layout Standard
11370 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11374 \begin_inset space ~
11380 \begin_layout Standard
11382 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11386 \begin_inset space ~
11392 \begin_layout Standard
11393 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11401 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11405 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11407 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11408 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11412 option in the space dialog.
11420 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11424 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11429 \begin_inset Index idx
11432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11441 \begin_layout Standard
11442 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11443 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11446 \begin_layout Standard
11447 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11450 What is correct English?:
11451 \begin_inset Newline newline
11455 \begin_inset Newline newline
11459 \begin_inset space ~
11462 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11463 \begin_inset Newline newline
11467 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11478 \begin_inset Newline newline
11482 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11493 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11499 \begin_layout Standard
11501 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11506 \begin_inset space ~
11510 \begin_inset space ~
11514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11518 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11520 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11521 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11525 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11531 \begin_inset space ~
11535 \begin_inset space ~
11539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11542 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11551 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11552 That is why it is named
11553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11561 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11562 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11566 \begin_layout Subsection
11568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11570 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11575 \begin_inset Index idx
11578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11587 \begin_layout Standard
11588 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11590 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11591 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11593 \begin_inset space ~
11599 There you find the following sizes:
11602 \begin_layout Standard
11615 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11616 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11621 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11623 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11624 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11626 \begin_inset space ~
11632 \begin_inset Index idx
11635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11636 Document ! Settings
11641 for the paragraph separation.
11642 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11653 \begin_layout Standard
11659 \begin_inset Index idx
11662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11668 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11669 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11674 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11675 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11684 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11693 s are described in section
11694 \begin_inset space ~
11698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11700 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11709 If there are several
11713 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11714 You can therefore use
11718 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11721 \begin_layout Standard
11726 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11727 \begin_inset space ~
11731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11733 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11740 \begin_layout Standard
11741 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11751 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11752 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11764 \begin_layout Subsection
11765 Paragraph Alignment
11766 \begin_inset Index idx
11769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11770 Paragraph ! Alignment
11778 \begin_layout Standard
11779 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11781 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11784 dialog (toolbar button
11787 arg "layout-paragraph"
11791 There are five possibilities:
11794 \begin_layout Itemize
11802 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11808 \begin_layout Itemize
11816 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11822 \begin_layout Itemize
11830 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11836 \begin_layout Itemize
11844 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11850 \begin_layout Itemize
11858 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11864 \begin_layout Standard
11865 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11866 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11867 the left and right margins.
11868 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11871 \begin_layout Standard
11873 This paragraph is right aligned,
11876 \begin_layout Standard
11878 this one is centered,
11881 \begin_layout Standard
11883 this one is left aligned.
11886 \begin_layout Subsection
11888 \begin_inset Index idx
11891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11892 Page breaks ! Forced
11898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11900 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11907 \begin_layout Standard
11908 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11909 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11910 force a page break where you want one.
11911 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11912 is good at page breaking.
11913 Only if you use a lot of
11917 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11918 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11921 \begin_layout Standard
11922 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11923 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11927 have to change the page breaking.
11930 \begin_layout Standard
11931 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11933 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11935 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11936 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11938 \begin_inset space ~
11944 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11946 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11947 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11949 \begin_inset space ~
11954 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11956 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11957 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11960 \begin_layout Standard
11961 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11962 at the top of a page.
11963 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11965 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11966 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11967 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11971 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11975 to learn more about
11982 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11986 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11991 \begin_inset Index idx
11994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11995 Page breaks ! Clear
12003 \begin_layout Standard
12004 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12005 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12006 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12007 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12008 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12011 \begin_layout Standard
12012 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12014 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12015 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12017 \begin_inset space ~
12023 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12025 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12026 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12028 \begin_inset space ~
12032 \begin_inset space ~
12037 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12038 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12041 \begin_layout Subsection
12043 \begin_inset Index idx
12046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12055 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12062 \begin_layout Standard
12063 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12065 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12067 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12068 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12070 \begin_inset space ~
12074 \begin_inset space ~
12082 arg "newline-insert newline"
12086 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12088 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12089 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12091 \begin_inset space ~
12095 \begin_inset space ~
12103 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12106 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12108 This is useful to avoid
12109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12116 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12119 \begin_layout Standard
12120 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12121 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12123 very good at line breaking.
12124 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12125 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12126 \begin_inset space ~
12130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12132 reference "sec:Quote"
12137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12139 reference "sec:Verse"
12144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12146 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12153 \begin_layout Subsection
12155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12157 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12162 \begin_inset Index idx
12165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12174 \begin_layout Standard
12176 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12187 \begin_layout Standard
12191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12192 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12194 \begin_inset space ~
12199 you can insert horizontal lines.
12200 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12201 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12202 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12205 \begin_layout Standard
12207 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12218 \begin_layout Section
12219 Characters and Symbols
12222 \begin_layout Standard
12223 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12224 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12225 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12233 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12237 for information on how this is done.
12240 \begin_layout Standard
12241 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12246 dialog via the menu
12248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12249 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12255 \begin_layout Standard
12256 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12264 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12265 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12267 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12275 \begin_layout Section
12276 Fonts and Text Styles
12277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12279 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12286 \begin_layout Subsection
12288 \begin_inset Index idx
12291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12300 \begin_layout Standard
12301 There are two types of fonts:
12304 \begin_layout Description
12306 \begin_inset space ~
12310 \begin_inset Index idx
12313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12319 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12324 characters) in the font.
12325 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12326 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12327 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12328 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12329 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12330 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12331 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12332 \begin_inset Newline newline
12335 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12336 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12337 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12338 sizes than at small ones.
12339 \begin_inset Newline newline
12353 \begin_inset space ~
12361 \begin_layout Description
12363 \begin_inset space ~
12367 \begin_inset Index idx
12370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12376 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12377 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12378 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12379 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12380 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12381 image manipulation program.
12382 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12383 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12384 \begin_inset space ~
12387 pixels high up to 34
12388 \begin_inset space ~
12391 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12392 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12393 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12395 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12396 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12397 \begin_inset Newline newline
12400 Bitmap fonts are named
12403 \begin_inset space ~
12408 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12411 \begin_layout Standard
12412 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12413 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12414 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12415 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12416 use scalable fonts.
12419 \begin_layout Standard
12420 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12423 \begin_layout Standard
12424 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12425 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12426 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12427 font to emphasize text, you use an
12428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12436 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12438 In \SpecialChar LyX
12439 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12443 \begin_layout Subsection
12446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12448 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12455 \begin_layout Standard
12456 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12457 used its own fonts.
12458 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12459 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12462 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12463 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12464 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12465 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12466 to a word processor.
12467 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12468 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12469 files are very portable across
12470 different machines.
12471 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12472 has increased a lot
12473 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12476 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12478 \begin_inset space ~
12482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12484 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12489 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12490 code in the document
12491 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12494 \begin_layout Standard
12495 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12496 engines that are also able directly
12497 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12499 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12501 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12503 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12504 that is installed on your system.
12505 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12508 \begin_layout Standard
12509 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12517 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12518 es; so you might have to experiment.
12526 \begin_layout Standard
12527 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12536 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12537 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12538 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12539 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12548 \begin_layout Subsection
12549 Document Font and Font size
12550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12552 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12557 \begin_inset Index idx
12560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12567 \begin_inset Index idx
12570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12579 \begin_layout Standard
12580 You can set the document fonts in the
12582 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12586 \begin_inset Index idx
12589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12590 Document ! Settings
12600 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12601 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12604 \begin_inset space ~
12613 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12615 \begin_inset space ~
12618 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12621 \begin_layout Standard
12626 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12627 This requires that you use
12639 as the output format, i.
12640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12644 \begin_inset space \space{}
12647 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12648 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12649 installed (see section
12650 \begin_inset space ~
12654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12656 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12661 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12663 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12664 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12666 \begin_inset space ~
12669 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12670 cannot determine the family.
12671 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12672 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12675 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12678 \begin_layout Standard
12679 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12680 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12685 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12691 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12692 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12700 \begin_inset space ~
12706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12719 European Computer Modern
12722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12729 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12732 \begin_layout Standard
12741 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12742 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12747 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12750 \begin_inset space ~
12755 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12761 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12762 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12765 \begin_layout Itemize
12769 \begin_inset space ~
12774 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12787 \begin_inset space ~
12792 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12793 community in order to replace
12797 as the default font.
12798 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12799 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12802 \begin_inset space ~
12815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12816 One difference is improved kerning.
12824 \begin_layout Itemize
12828 \begin_inset space ~
12832 \begin_inset space ~
12837 fonts in (the rare) case that
12840 \begin_inset space ~
12845 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12860 Virtual means that it
12861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12872 -glyphs from other fonts.
12873 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12895 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12901 \begin_inset Index idx
12904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12906 -packages ! aeguill
12911 with the document preamble line
12912 \begin_inset Newline newline
12919 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12920 \begin_inset Newline newline
12925 will fix the guillemet problem.
12930 and that accented characters are not
12934 glyph, but built of
12938 characters, the accent and the letter.
12939 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12945 If you search for example for the French word
12946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12953 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12962 and not for the glyph
12963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12967 \begin_inset space ~
12971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12977 \begin_layout Itemize
12978 If you do not like the look of
12986 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12991 \begin_inset space ~
12997 \begin_inset space ~
13007 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13008 \begin_inset space ~
13011 serif and typewriter fonts,
13015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13016 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13023 \begin_inset space ~
13032 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13033 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13037 \begin_inset space \space{}
13045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13049 \begin_inset space \space{}
13055 \begin_inset space ~
13063 \begin_inset space ~
13073 but you can also select your own.
13074 \begin_inset Newline newline
13077 The differences between roman,
13080 \begin_inset space ~
13089 fonts are explained in section
13090 \begin_inset space ~
13094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13096 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13101 \begin_inset Newline newline
13107 \begin_inset space ~
13112 was originally designed for newspapers.
13113 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13114 into the small newspaper columns.
13118 \begin_inset space ~
13123 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13126 \begin_layout Standard
13127 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13140 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13145 depends on the class you are using.
13146 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13149 \begin_layout Standard
13150 Note that the font size is the
13155 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13156 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13157 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13158 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13161 \begin_inset space ~
13167 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13168 \begin_inset space ~
13172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13174 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13181 \begin_layout Standard
13185 \begin_inset space ~
13190 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13192 \begin_inset space ~
13195 serif or typewriter.
13200 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13210 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13213 \begin_layout Standard
13218 LaTeX font encoding
13220 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13221 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13227 \begin_inset Index idx
13230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13232 -packages ! fontenc
13238 \begin_inset space ~
13242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13244 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13249 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13250 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13257 \begin_layout Standard
13258 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13260 Use Old Style Figures
13264 Use True Small Caps
13267 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13270 Use Old Style Figures
13272 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13274 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13282 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13286 Use True Small Caps
13288 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13289 of scaled capitals.
13290 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13291 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13294 \begin_layout Standard
13299 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13300 a font to display the script characters.
13304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13305 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13311 \begin_inset Index idx
13314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13321 So this has no effect for the document language
13335 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13339 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13347 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13352 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13353 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13355 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13357 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13360 dialog, see section
13361 \begin_inset space ~
13365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13367 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13379 \begin_layout Subsection
13383 \begin_layout Standard
13384 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13385 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13387 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13388 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13389 choose a math font in the dialog
13391 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13395 \begin_inset Index idx
13398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13399 Document ! Settings
13405 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13406 automatically selects a math font.
13407 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13408 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13417 \begin_inset space ~
13423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13428 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13429 document font is available.
13432 \begin_layout Standard
13433 Note that the math font will not be used for
13437 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13443 or by the insertion of the command
13450 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13451 \begin_inset space ~
13455 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13456 while the math characters do not.
13458 \begin_inset space ~
13461 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13464 \begin_inset space ~
13472 \begin_inset space ~
13477 in the document font settings.
13480 \begin_layout Standard
13481 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13482 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13483 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13484 font (in most cases
13485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13491 \begin_inset space ~
13497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13500 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13501 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13509 \begin_inset space ~
13515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13521 \begin_layout Subsection
13522 Using Different Character Styles
13523 \begin_inset Index idx
13526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13533 \begin_inset Index idx
13536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13545 \begin_layout Standard
13546 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13547 automatically changes the character style for certain
13548 paragraph environments.
13550 supports two character styles,
13559 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13563 \begin_layout Standard
13568 style, do one of the following:
13571 \begin_layout Itemize
13572 click on the toolbar button
13581 \begin_layout Itemize
13582 use the key binding
13591 \begin_layout Standard
13592 These commands are all toggles.
13597 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13600 \begin_layout Standard
13601 One typically uses the
13605 style for proper names.
13607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13614 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13622 \begin_layout Standard
13623 A more widely used character style is the
13628 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13635 \begin_layout Itemize
13636 clicking on the toolbar button
13645 \begin_layout Itemize
13646 using the keybindings
13655 \begin_layout Standard
13660 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13662 use a different font.
13665 \begin_layout Standard
13666 We've been using the
13670 style all over the place in this document.
13671 Here's one more example:
13674 \begin_layout Quotation
13677 Do not overuse character styles!
13680 \begin_layout Standard
13681 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13682 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13683 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13684 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13688 \begin_layout Standard
13689 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13697 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13699 \begin_inset space ~
13702 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13708 arg "dialog-show character"
13714 \begin_layout Subsection
13715 Fine-Tuning with the
13720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13722 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13727 \begin_inset Index idx
13730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13739 \begin_layout Standard
13740 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13742 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13743 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13744 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13745 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13746 from ordinary dialog.
13749 \begin_layout Standard
13750 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13751 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13752 \begin_inset Newline newline
13755 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13756 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13759 \begin_layout Standard
13760 To use custom character styles, open the
13762 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13764 \begin_inset space ~
13767 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13770 dialog or press the toolbar button
13773 arg "dialog-show character"
13777 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13778 font property that you can choose.
13779 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13782 \begin_inset space ~
13787 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13792 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13793 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13794 environments all at once.
13797 \begin_layout Standard
13798 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13801 \begin_inset space ~
13813 \begin_layout Labeling
13814 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13828 The possible options are:
13832 \begin_layout Labeling
13833 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13838 This is the Roman font family.
13839 Normally a serif font.
13840 It's also the default family.
13850 \begin_layout Labeling
13851 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13855 \begin_inset space ~
13862 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13874 \begin_layout Labeling
13875 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13882 This is the Typewriter font family.
13888 arg "font-typewriter"
13897 \begin_layout Labeling
13898 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13903 This corresponds to the print weight.
13908 \begin_layout Labeling
13909 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13914 This is the Medium font series.
13915 It's also the default series.
13918 \begin_layout Labeling
13919 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13926 This is the Bold font series.
13939 \begin_layout Labeling
13940 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13945 As the name implies.
13950 \begin_layout Labeling
13951 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13956 This is the Upright font shape.
13957 It's also the default shape.
13960 \begin_layout Labeling
13961 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13975 s the Italic font shape
13981 \begin_layout Labeling
13982 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13989 This is the Slanted font shape
13991 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13992 , this is different from italic).
13995 \begin_layout Labeling
13996 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14000 \begin_inset space ~
14007 This is the Small caps font shape
14014 \begin_layout Labeling
14015 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14020 Alters the text color.
14021 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14025 \begin_inset space ~
14030 , which means that the document default color set in
14032 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14033 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14039 \begin_inset space ~
14044 is used, you can choose between
14121 \begin_inset Index idx
14124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14133 \begin_layout Labeling
14134 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14139 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14140 the language of the document.
14141 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14142 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14144 \begin_inset Newline newline
14147 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14149 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14150 When using the spell checking (see section
14151 \begin_inset space ~
14155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14157 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14161 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14164 \begin_layout Labeling
14165 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14170 Alters the size of the font.
14171 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14172 proportional to the document font size.
14173 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14174 the details, but a general description of what
14180 \begin_layout Labeling
14181 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14202 arg "font-size tiny"
14208 \begin_layout Labeling
14209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14230 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14236 \begin_layout Labeling
14237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14258 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14264 \begin_layout Labeling
14265 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14286 arg "font-size small"
14292 \begin_layout Labeling
14293 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14307 It's also the default size.
14311 arg "font-size normal"
14317 \begin_layout Labeling
14318 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14339 arg "font-size large"
14345 \begin_layout Labeling
14346 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14367 arg "font-size larger"
14373 \begin_layout Labeling
14374 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14395 arg "font-size largest"
14401 \begin_layout Labeling
14402 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14423 arg "font-size huge"
14429 \begin_layout Labeling
14430 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14451 arg "font-size giant"
14457 \begin_layout Labeling
14458 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14463 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14483 arg "font-size increase"
14489 \begin_layout Labeling
14490 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14495 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14515 arg "font-size decrease"
14522 \begin_layout Standard
14527 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14528 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14530 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14531 — use those instead.
14532 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14535 \begin_layout Labeling
14536 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14541 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14546 \begin_layout Labeling
14547 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14554 This is text with emphasize on
14557 This might seem like the same as
14561 , but it is actually a bit different.
14567 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14569 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14572 \begin_layout Labeling
14573 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14580 This is text with Underbar on.
14586 arg "font-underline"
14592 \begin_inset Newline newline
14597 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14598 when you could not change fonts.
14599 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14600 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14601 because some people
14605 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14608 \begin_layout Labeling
14609 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14613 \begin_inset space ~
14620 This is text with Double underbar on.
14626 arg "font-underunderline"
14630 \begin_inset Newline newline
14633 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14634 about double underbar.
14637 \begin_layout Labeling
14638 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14642 \begin_inset space ~
14649 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14655 arg "font-underwave"
14659 \begin_inset Newline newline
14662 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14663 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14666 \begin_layout Labeling
14667 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14674 This is text with Strikeout on.
14680 arg "font-strikeout"
14684 \begin_inset Newline newline
14687 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14688 changed in the meantime.
14691 \begin_layout Labeling
14692 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14699 This is text with Noun on.
14706 , this is a logical attribute.
14707 Normally it's equivalent to
14710 \begin_inset space ~
14719 \begin_layout Standard
14720 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14721 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14723 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14725 \begin_inset space ~
14728 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14734 arg "dialog-show character"
14737 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14738 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14741 arg "textstyle-apply"
14745 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14749 \begin_layout Standard
14750 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14757 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14758 (suppose you just set the shape to
14759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14777 \begin_inset space ~
14789 \begin_layout Standard
14790 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14798 \begin_inset space ~
14810 \begin_layout Itemize
14816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14823 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14841 \begin_inset Newline newline
14845 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14859 \begin_inset Note Note
14862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14863 For more on phantoms see section
14864 \begin_inset space ~
14868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14870 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14880 \begin_inset Newline newline
14886 \begin_layout Itemize
14891 fonts use characters with serifs.
14892 These are the small
14893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14900 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14901 The following example shows the difference:
14902 \begin_inset Newline newline
14906 \begin_inset Newline newline
14911 text without serifs
14914 \begin_inset Newline newline
14917 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14918 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14925 \begin_layout Itemize
14930 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14931 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14932 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14935 \begin_layout Standard
14936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14943 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14944 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14947 \begin_inset space ~
14952 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14953 the property to be removed.
14954 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14955 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14956 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14974 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14975 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14983 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14987 \begin_inset space ~
14992 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15003 If you, for example, set
15004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15022 \begin_inset space ~
15027 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15036 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15039 \begin_layout Standard
15040 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15041 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15044 \begin_layout Section
15045 Printing and Previewing
15048 \begin_layout Subsection
15052 \begin_layout Standard
15053 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15054 using \SpecialChar LyX
15055 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15056 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15057 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15058 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15060 Additional Features
15065 \begin_layout Standard
15067 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15070 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15071 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15072 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15075 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15076 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15077 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15078 to turn your writing into printable output.
15079 This happens in two stages:
15082 \begin_layout Enumerate
15083 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15084 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15086 a file with the extension,
15087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15101 \begin_layout Enumerate
15102 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15103 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15104 to use the commands in the
15108 file to produce printable output.
15111 \begin_layout Subsection
15112 Output file formats
15113 \begin_inset Index idx
15116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15125 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15132 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15133 Simple text (ASCII)
15134 \begin_inset Index idx
15137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15138 File formats ! ASCII
15146 \begin_layout Standard
15147 This file type has the extension
15148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15160 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15164 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15171 \begin_layout Standard
15172 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15174 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15175 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15177 \begin_inset space ~
15183 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15184 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15185 bibliography (section
15186 \begin_inset space ~
15190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15192 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15197 If your document includes such material, use
15199 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15200 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15202 \begin_inset space ~
15206 \begin_inset space ~
15210 \begin_inset space ~
15218 \begin_inset space ~
15222 \begin_inset space ~
15228 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15229 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15232 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15235 \begin_inset Index idx
15238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15239 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15248 \begin_layout Standard
15249 This file type has the extension
15250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15261 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15264 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15265 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15266 -Errors or to process it manually
15267 with console commands.
15268 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15269 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15270 's temporary directory whenever you
15271 view or export your document.
15274 \begin_layout Standard
15275 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15276 -file using the menu
15278 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15279 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15283 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15284 export variants are explained in section
15285 \begin_inset space ~
15289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15291 reference "subsec:Export"
15298 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15300 \begin_inset Index idx
15303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15312 \begin_layout Standard
15313 This file type has the extension
15314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15334 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15335 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15336 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15340 \begin_layout Standard
15341 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15342 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15343 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15344 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15345 when you view the DVI.
15346 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15349 \begin_layout Standard
15350 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15352 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15353 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15358 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15359 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15361 \begin_inset space ~
15367 The latter option uses the program
15369 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15375 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15378 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15379 font access (see section
15380 \begin_inset space ~
15384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15386 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15391 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15392 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15399 \begin_inset Index idx
15402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15403 File formats ! PostScript
15411 \begin_layout Standard
15412 This file type has the extension
15413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15425 PostScript was developed by the company
15429 as a printer language.
15430 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15432 PostScript can be seen as a
15433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15436 programming language
15437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15440 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15445 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15452 \begin_inset Index idx
15455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15457 -packages ! pstricks
15467 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15470 \begin_layout Standard
15471 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15475 Encapsulated PostScript
15476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15479 (EPS, file extension
15480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15492 As \SpecialChar LyX
15493 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15494 convert them in the background to EPS.
15495 If, for example, you have 50
15496 \begin_inset space ~
15499 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15501 \begin_inset space ~
15504 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15505 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15507 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15508 EPS to avoid this problem.
15511 \begin_layout Standard
15512 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15514 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15515 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15521 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15523 \begin_inset Index idx
15526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15533 \begin_inset Index idx
15536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15545 \begin_layout Standard
15546 This file type has the extension
15547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15563 Portable Document Format
15564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15571 was derived from PostScript.
15572 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15581 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15582 looks exactly the same.
15585 \begin_layout Standard
15586 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15590 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15594 (JPG, file extension
15595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15622 Portable Network Graphics
15623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15626 (PNG, file extension
15627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15639 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15640 converts them in the
15641 background to one of these formats.
15642 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15643 will slow down your workflow.
15644 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15647 \begin_layout Standard
15648 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15650 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15656 \begin_layout Description
15658 \begin_inset space ~
15661 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15665 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15668 \begin_layout Description
15670 \begin_inset space ~
15677 ) This uses the program
15679 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15682 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15685 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15688 is a new engine, derived from
15692 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15693 access (see section
15694 \begin_inset space ~
15698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15700 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15705 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15706 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15711 \begin_layout Description
15713 \begin_inset space ~
15720 ) This uses the program
15725 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15731 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15732 font access (see section
15733 \begin_inset space ~
15737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15739 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15744 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15745 vertically written Japanese.
15748 \begin_layout Description
15750 \begin_inset space ~
15753 (cropped) This is the same as
15756 \begin_inset space ~
15761 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15762 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15763 to generate good-looking
15764 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15767 \begin_layout Description
15769 \begin_inset space ~
15772 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15776 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15780 \begin_layout Description
15782 \begin_inset space ~
15785 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15789 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15790 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15794 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15795 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15798 \begin_layout Standard
15802 \begin_inset space ~
15811 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15812 works without problems.
15813 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15814 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15818 \begin_inset space ~
15826 \begin_inset space ~
15831 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15839 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15841 \begin_inset Index idx
15844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15845 FileFormats ! XHTML
15851 \begin_inset Index idx
15854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15863 \begin_layout Standard
15864 This file type has the extension
15865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15877 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15878 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15879 When \SpecialChar LyX
15880 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15881 suitable for the purpose.
15882 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15884 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15885 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15888 between different formats, which are described in section
15890 Math Output in XHTML
15895 \begin_inset space ~
15903 \begin_layout Standard
15904 XHTML output remains
15905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15912 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15913 features are supported yet.
15917 and the World Wide Web
15921 Additional Features
15923 manual, for more information.
15926 \begin_layout Standard
15927 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15929 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15930 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15936 \begin_layout Subsection
15938 \begin_inset Index idx
15941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15950 \begin_layout Standard
15951 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15952 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15961 or use the toolbar button
15968 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15969 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15976 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15980 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15988 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15993 Further output formats can be selected via
15995 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15996 View (Other Formats)
15998 or the toolbar button
16007 \begin_layout Standard
16008 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16009 viewer window using the menu
16011 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16016 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16017 Update (Other Formats)
16022 \begin_layout Standard
16023 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16026 To have a real output, export your document.
16029 \begin_layout Section
16030 A few Words about Typography
16031 \begin_inset Index idx
16034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16043 \begin_layout Subsection
16044 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16045 \begin_inset Index idx
16048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16055 \begin_inset Index idx
16058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16067 \begin_layout Standard
16068 In \SpecialChar LyX
16070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16081 character comes in four lengths: the
16093 , and the minus sign:
16094 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16100 \begin_layout Standard
16101 \begin_inset Tabular
16102 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16103 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16104 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16105 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16106 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16107 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16136 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16176 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16203 \begin_inset space ~
16206 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16213 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16240 \begin_inset space ~
16243 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16264 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16298 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16304 \begin_layout Standard
16305 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16317 character multiple times in a row.
16318 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16319 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16352 \begin_layout Standard
16353 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16354 math mode and has a length of its own.
16355 Here are some examples:
16358 \begin_layout Enumerate
16359 line- and page-breaks
16360 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16370 \begin_layout Enumerate
16372 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16382 \begin_layout Enumerate
16383 Oh — there's a dash.
16384 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16394 \begin_layout Enumerate
16395 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16399 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16409 \begin_layout Subsection
16411 \begin_inset Index idx
16414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16423 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16430 \begin_layout Standard
16431 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16432 but automatically in the output.
16433 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16439 \begin_inset Index idx
16442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16449 following the rules of the document language.
16452 \begin_layout Standard
16454 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16458 font and with unusual constructs, like
16459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16467 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16468 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16469 This is done with the menu
16471 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16472 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16474 \begin_inset space ~
16480 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16482 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16486 \begin_layout Standard
16487 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16488 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16499 would then see the hyphen
16500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16507 as a hyphenation possibility.
16508 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16509 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16510 as described in section
16511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16514 Prevent Hyphenation
16515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16521 \begin_inset space ~
16529 \begin_layout Subsection
16531 \begin_inset Index idx
16534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16543 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16544 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16547 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16554 \begin_layout Standard
16555 When \SpecialChar LyX
16556 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16557 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16559 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16565 appropriate amount of space.
16566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16569 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16571 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16572 gets after another word.
16575 \begin_layout Standard
16576 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16577 not work in all cases.
16579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16590 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16591 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16594 \begin_layout Standard
16595 Here are some examples of
16599 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16602 \begin_layout Itemize
16607 \begin_layout Itemize
16612 \begin_layout Standard
16613 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16616 \begin_layout Itemize
16618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16622 this is too much space!
16625 \begin_layout Itemize
16630 \begin_layout Standard
16631 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16634 \begin_layout Standard
16635 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16638 \begin_layout Enumerate
16642 \begin_inset space ~
16647 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16648 \begin_inset space ~
16652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16654 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16659 \begin_inset Index idx
16662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16663 Spaces ! inter-word
16671 \begin_layout Enumerate
16675 \begin_inset space ~
16680 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16681 \begin_inset space ~
16685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16687 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16692 \begin_inset Index idx
16695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16704 \begin_layout Enumerate
16708 \begin_inset space ~
16712 \begin_inset space ~
16716 \begin_inset space ~
16723 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16725 \begin_inset space ~
16730 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16731 This function is also bound to
16734 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16740 \begin_layout Standard
16741 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16744 \begin_layout Itemize
16746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16750 \begin_inset space \space{}
16753 this is too much space!
16756 \begin_layout Itemize
16757 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16761 \begin_layout Standard
16762 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16763 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16765 will take care of this.
16768 \begin_layout Standard
16769 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16773 \begin_inset space ~
16779 feature described in the section
16781 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16786 Additional Features
16791 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16793 \begin_inset Index idx
16796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16797 Typography ! Quotes
16803 \begin_inset Index idx
16806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16837 \begin_layout Standard
16839 usually sets quotes correctly.
16840 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16841 and use a closing quote at the end.
16843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16851 The keyboard character,
16855 , generates this automatically.
16858 \begin_layout Standard
16859 You can specify what character the
16863 key produces using the submenu
16869 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16873 \begin_inset Index idx
16876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16877 Document ! Settings
16887 There are six choices:
16890 \begin_layout Labeling
16891 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16914 \begin_layout Labeling
16915 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16918 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16922 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16928 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16932 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16938 \begin_layout Labeling
16939 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16942 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16946 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16952 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16956 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16962 \begin_layout Labeling
16963 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16966 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16970 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16976 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16980 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16986 \begin_layout Labeling
16987 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16990 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16994 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17000 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17004 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17010 \begin_layout Labeling
17011 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17014 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17018 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17024 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17028 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17034 \begin_layout Standard
17035 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17038 arg "quote-insert single"
17044 \begin_layout Subsection
17046 \begin_inset Index idx
17049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17050 Typography ! Ligatures
17056 \begin_inset Index idx
17059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17088 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17090 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17097 \begin_layout Standard
17098 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17099 print them as single characters.
17100 These groups are known as
17105 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17106 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17108 Here are the standard ligatures:
17111 \begin_layout Itemize
17115 \begin_layout Itemize
17119 \begin_layout Itemize
17123 \begin_layout Itemize
17127 \begin_layout Itemize
17131 \begin_layout Standard
17132 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17135 \begin_layout Standard
17136 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17137 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17145 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17161 To break a ligature, use
17163 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17164 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17166 \begin_inset space ~
17173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17184 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17201 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17209 \begin_layout Subsection
17211 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17213 \begin_inset Index idx
17216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17226 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17233 \begin_layout Standard
17236 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17240 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17243 \begin_layout Description
17245 The name of the game.
17248 \begin_layout Description
17250 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17254 \begin_layout Description
17256 The \SpecialChar TeX
17257 macro colletion used by \SpecialChar LyX
17261 \begin_layout Description
17262 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17263 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17267 \begin_layout Standard
17268 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17274 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17282 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17283 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17284 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17285 converges to the number
17286 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17289 : The actual version is
17290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17298 , the previous one was
17299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17310 \begin_layout Subsection
17312 \begin_inset Index idx
17315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17324 \begin_layout Standard
17325 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17326 space between two words.
17327 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17337 for units use the menu
17339 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17340 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17342 \begin_inset space ~
17350 arg "space-insert thin"
17356 \begin_layout Standard
17357 Here is an example to show the differences:
17360 \begin_layout Standard
17361 \begin_inset Tabular
17362 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17363 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17364 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17365 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17372 \begin_inset space ~
17376 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17388 space between number and unit
17395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17404 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17416 half space between number and unit
17429 \begin_layout Subsection
17431 \begin_inset Index idx
17434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17435 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17443 \begin_layout Standard
17444 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17446 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17447 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17448 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17449 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17450 These bits of text became known as
17461 \begin_layout Standard
17462 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17463 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17464 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17465 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17466 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17467 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17468 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17469 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17470 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17471 \begin_inset Newline newline
17479 \begin_inset Newline newline
17487 \begin_inset Newline newline
17490 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17491 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17492 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17494 \begin_inset space ~
17498 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17500 key "latexcompanion"
17505 \begin_inset space ~
17509 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17515 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17516 's page break mechanism.
17519 \begin_layout Chapter
17520 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17523 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17530 \begin_layout Standard
17531 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17534 \begin_inset space ~
17540 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17543 \begin_layout Section
17545 \begin_inset Index idx
17548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17564 \begin_layout Standard
17566 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17569 \begin_layout Description
17572 \begin_inset space ~
17575 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17576 \begin_inset Newline newline
17580 \begin_inset Note Note
17583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17584 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17592 \begin_layout Description
17593 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17594 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17595 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17598 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17599 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17601 \begin_inset space ~
17607 \begin_inset Newline newline
17611 \begin_inset Note Comment
17614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17615 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17624 \begin_layout Description
17626 \begin_inset space ~
17629 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17630 set in the document settings under
17632 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17634 \begin_inset space ~
17640 \begin_inset Newline newline
17644 \begin_inset Newline newline
17648 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17657 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17658 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17663 of a comment that appears in the output.
17669 \begin_inset Newline newline
17673 \begin_inset Newline newline
17676 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17679 \begin_layout Standard
17680 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17688 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17692 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17695 \begin_layout Section
17697 \begin_inset Index idx
17700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17709 name "sec:Footnotes"
17716 \begin_layout Standard
17718 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17721 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17724 or the toolbar button
17727 arg "footnote-insert"
17739 \begin_inset Graphics
17740 filename clipart/footnote.png
17749 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17750 's representation of your footnote.
17760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17779 label, the box will
17783 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17784 Clicking on the box label again will close
17797 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17798 and click on the footnote
17813 \begin_layout Standard
17814 Here is an example footnote:
17822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17823 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17831 \begin_layout Standard
17832 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17833 position where the footnote box is placed.
17834 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17835 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17836 according to the document class.
17838 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17839 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17845 ey are described in the
17848 \begin_inset space ~
17856 \begin_layout Section
17858 \begin_inset Index idx
17861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17870 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17877 \begin_layout Standard
17878 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17880 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17882 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17884 \begin_inset space ~
17889 or the toolbar button
17892 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17918 appearing within your text.
17919 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17920 's representation of your margin
17929 \begin_layout Standard
17930 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17934 \begin_inset Marginal
17937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17939 This is a marginal note.
17947 \begin_layout Standard
17948 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17949 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17950 pages, right on odd pages.
17953 \begin_layout Standard
17954 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17957 \begin_inset space ~
17965 \begin_inset space ~
17973 \begin_layout Section
17974 Graphics and Images
17975 \begin_inset Index idx
17978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17985 \begin_inset Index idx
17988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17997 name "sec:Graphics"
18004 \begin_layout Standard
18005 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18006 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18009 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18014 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18018 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18021 \begin_layout Standard
18022 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18027 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18028 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18030 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18031 \begin_inset space ~
18035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18037 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18044 \begin_layout Standard
18049 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18050 of the image in the output.
18051 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18055 \begin_inset space ~
18059 \begin_inset space ~
18068 \begin_inset space ~
18072 \begin_inset space ~
18076 \begin_inset space ~
18081 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18082 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18090 \begin_layout Standard
18094 \begin_inset space ~
18098 \begin_inset space ~
18103 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18104 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18106 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18111 \begin_inset space ~
18116 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18117 with the image size is printed.
18120 \begin_layout Standard
18121 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18122 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18124 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18127 \begin_layout Standard
18129 \begin_inset Graphics
18130 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18138 \begin_layout Standard
18139 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18140 the image into a float, see section
18141 \begin_inset space ~
18145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18147 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18154 \begin_layout Subsection
18156 \begin_inset Index idx
18159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18168 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18175 \begin_layout Standard
18176 You can insert images in any known file format.
18177 But as we explained in section
18178 \begin_inset space ~
18182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18184 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18188 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18190 therefore uses the program
18194 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18195 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18196 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18197 \begin_inset space ~
18201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18203 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18210 \begin_layout Standard
18211 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18214 \begin_layout Description
18216 \begin_inset space ~
18219 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18220 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18221 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18225 Graphics Interchange Format
18226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18229 (GIF, file extension
18230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18242 \begin_inset Index idx
18245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18277 Portable Network Graphics
18278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18281 (PNG, file extension
18282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18294 \begin_inset Index idx
18297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18329 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18333 (JPG, file extension
18334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18358 \begin_inset Index idx
18361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18392 \begin_layout Description
18394 \begin_inset space ~
18397 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18399 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18400 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18401 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18402 \begin_inset Newline newline
18405 Scalable image formats can be
18406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18409 Scalable Vector Graphics
18410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18413 (SVG, file extension
18414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18426 \begin_inset Index idx
18429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18461 Encapsulated PostScript
18462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18465 (EPS, file extension
18466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18478 \begin_inset Index idx
18481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18513 Portable Document Format
18514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18517 (PDF, file extension
18518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18530 \begin_inset Index idx
18533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18548 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18549 result will not be scalable.
18550 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18556 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18564 \begin_layout Standard
18565 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18572 \begin_layout Subsection
18573 Grouping of Image Settings
18574 \begin_inset Index idx
18577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18578 Images ! Settings grouping
18586 \begin_layout Standard
18587 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18589 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18590 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18592 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18593 need to manually change each of them.
18597 \begin_layout Standard
18598 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18601 \begin_inset space ~
18605 \begin_inset space ~
18617 \begin_inset space ~
18621 \begin_inset space ~
18627 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18628 and checking the name of the desired group.
18631 \begin_layout Section
18633 \begin_inset Index idx
18636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18652 \begin_layout Standard
18653 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18656 arg "tabular-insert"
18661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18665 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18666 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18667 from the rest of the table.
18668 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18669 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18671 Here is an example table:
18674 \begin_layout Standard
18676 \begin_inset Tabular
18677 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18678 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18679 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18680 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18681 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18682 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18882 \begin_layout Subsection
18886 \begin_layout Standard
18887 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18890 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
18894 This brings up the table dialog.
18895 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18896 cursor is placed currently.
18897 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18898 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18899 done on all of your selection.
18902 \begin_layout Standard
18903 In addition to the table dialog, the
18906 \begin_inset space ~
18911 helps you in setting table properties.
18912 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18915 \begin_layout Standard
18919 \begin_inset space ~
18924 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18925 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18926 current cell respectively.
18927 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18929 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18930 of text, see section
18931 \begin_inset space ~
18935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18937 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18944 \begin_layout Standard
18945 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18946 using the check box
18955 This will merge the cells to
18959 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18960 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18961 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18962 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18963 in the last row without the upper border:
18966 \begin_layout Standard
18968 \begin_inset Tabular
18969 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18970 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18971 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18972 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18973 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18974 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18985 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18994 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19070 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19105 \begin_layout Standard
19106 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19107 -arguments for the table.
19108 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19109 explained in the chapter
19116 \begin_inset space ~
19122 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19123 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19124 but are visible in the output.
19127 \begin_layout Standard
19128 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19136 Most DVI-viewers are
19140 able to display rotations.
19148 \begin_layout Standard
19153 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19158 adds lines for all cell borders.
19161 \begin_layout Subsection
19163 \begin_inset Index idx
19166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19167 Tables ! Longtables
19173 \begin_inset Index idx
19176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19185 \begin_layout Standard
19186 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19189 \begin_inset space ~
19193 \begin_inset space ~
19202 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19203 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19206 \begin_layout Description
19211 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19212 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19213 except for the first page, if
19216 \begin_inset space ~
19224 \begin_layout Description
19228 \begin_inset space ~
19233 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19234 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19237 \begin_layout Description
19242 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19243 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19244 except for the last page, if
19247 \begin_inset space ~
19255 \begin_layout Description
19259 \begin_inset space ~
19264 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19265 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19268 \begin_layout Description
19269 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19270 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19272 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19276 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19279 \begin_inset space ~
19287 \begin_layout Standard
19288 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19289 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19290 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19296 In this context, first means first in this order:
19299 \begin_inset space ~
19311 \begin_inset space ~
19316 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19319 \begin_layout Standard
19321 \begin_inset Tabular
19322 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19323 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19324 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19325 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19326 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19327 <row endfirsthead="true">
19328 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19334 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19339 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19348 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19358 <row endfirsthead="true">
19359 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19370 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19379 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19391 <row endhead="true">
19392 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19403 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19412 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19422 <row endhead="true">
19423 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19434 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19443 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19455 <row endfoot="true">
19456 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19467 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19476 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19507 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20448 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20457 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20466 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20477 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20508 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20539 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20570 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20601 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20632 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20663 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20694 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20725 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20756 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20787 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20818 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20849 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20880 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20911 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20942 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20973 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21004 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21035 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21066 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21097 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21128 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21159 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21190 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21221 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21252 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21283 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21314 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21345 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21376 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21407 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 <row endlastfoot="true">
21438 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21449 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21458 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21475 \begin_layout Subsection
21477 \begin_inset Index idx
21480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21489 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21496 \begin_layout Standard
21497 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21498 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21499 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21500 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21504 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21507 \begin_layout Standard
21508 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21509 for the column in the table dialog.
21510 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21511 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21515 \begin_layout Standard
21517 \begin_inset Tabular
21518 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21519 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21520 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21521 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21522 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21542 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21611 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21667 This is longer now.
21672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21723 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21724 This is longer now.
21729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21755 \begin_layout Standard
21756 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21757 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21762 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21763 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21769 Selection with the mouse or with
21773 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21774 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21775 the selection from outside the table.
21778 \begin_layout Section
21780 \begin_inset Index idx
21783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21799 \begin_layout Subsection
21803 \begin_layout Standard
21804 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21805 have a fixed location.
21807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21814 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21822 \begin_inset space ~
21827 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21828 too many notes on the current page.
21831 \begin_layout Standard
21832 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21833 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21834 and pages without text.
21835 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21836 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21837 Floats are therefore numbered.
21838 Referencing is described in section
21839 \begin_inset space ~
21843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21845 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21852 \begin_layout Standard
21853 To insert a float, use the menu
21855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21859 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21860 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21862 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21863 \begin_inset Index idx
21866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21872 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21873 paragraph within the float.
21874 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21875 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21876 left-clicking on the box label.
21877 A closed float box looks like this:
21878 \begin_inset Graphics
21879 filename clipart/float.png
21884 – a gray button with a red label.
21887 \begin_layout Standard
21888 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
21890 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21893 \begin_layout Subsection
21895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21897 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21902 \begin_inset Index idx
21905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21906 Floats ! Figure floats
21914 \begin_layout Standard
21916 \begin_inset space ~
21920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21922 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21926 was created using the menu
21928 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21929 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21935 arg "float-insert figure"
21939 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21942 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21948 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21952 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21953 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21955 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21957 \begin_inset space ~
21965 arg "layout-paragraph"
21971 \begin_layout Standard
21972 \begin_inset Float figure
21977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21979 \begin_inset Graphics
21980 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21990 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21995 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21999 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22012 \begin_layout Standard
22013 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22014 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22016 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22025 ) and refer to it using the menu
22027 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22033 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22037 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22038 vague references like
22039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22046 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22047 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22057 For more about cross-references, see section
22058 \begin_inset space ~
22062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22064 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22071 \begin_layout Standard
22072 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22073 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22074 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22075 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22076 as described in section
22077 \begin_inset space ~
22081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22083 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22089 \begin_inset space ~
22093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22095 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22099 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22100 You can also set the images one below the other.
22102 \begin_inset space ~
22106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22108 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22115 reference "fig:Platypus"
22119 are the subfigures.
22122 \begin_layout Standard
22123 \begin_inset Float figure
22128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22129 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22133 \begin_inset Float figure
22138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22139 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22144 name "fig:Undefinable"
22156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22157 \begin_inset Graphics
22158 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22169 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22173 \begin_inset Float figure
22178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22179 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22182 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22184 name "fig:Platypus"
22196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22197 \begin_inset Graphics
22198 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22210 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22217 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22222 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22226 Two distorted images.
22239 \begin_layout Subsection
22241 \begin_inset Index idx
22244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22245 Floats ! Table floats
22253 \begin_layout Standard
22254 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22256 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22257 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22260 or the toolbar button
22263 arg "float-insert table"
22267 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22268 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22269 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22271 \begin_inset space ~
22275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22277 reference "tab:Table-float"
22284 \begin_layout Standard
22285 \begin_inset Float table
22290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22296 name "tab:Table-float"
22308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22310 \begin_inset Tabular
22311 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22312 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22313 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22314 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22315 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22442 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22463 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22466 \end{array}\right]$
22474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22487 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22508 \begin_layout Subsection
22510 \begin_inset Index idx
22513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22522 \begin_layout Standard
22524 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22525 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22526 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22528 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22536 \begin_inset space ~
22544 \begin_layout Section
22546 \begin_inset Index idx
22549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22558 \begin_layout Standard
22560 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22562 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22563 \begin_inset space \space{}
22570 \begin_layout Standard
22571 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22572 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22574 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22578 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22579 and its alignment within the page.
22582 \begin_layout Standard
22584 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22594 height_special "totalheight"
22599 backgroundcolor "none"
22602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22605 This is a minipage.
22606 The text is set in an italic style.
22609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22613 another formatting.
22621 \begin_layout Standard
22622 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22625 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22629 as described in section
22630 \begin_inset space ~
22634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22636 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22641 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22647 \begin_layout Standard
22648 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22658 height_special "totalheight"
22663 backgroundcolor "none"
22666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22667 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22668 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22674 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22678 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22688 height_special "totalheight"
22693 backgroundcolor "none"
22696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22697 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22698 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22706 \begin_layout Standard
22707 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22713 \begin_layout Standard
22714 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22716 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22723 \begin_inset space ~
22731 \begin_layout Chapter
22732 Mathematical Formulas
22733 \begin_inset Index idx
22736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22743 \begin_inset Index idx
22746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22777 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22784 \begin_layout Standard
22785 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22790 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22793 \begin_layout Section
22795 \begin_inset Index idx
22798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22807 \begin_layout Standard
22808 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22821 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22823 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22824 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22825 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22827 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22833 \begin_layout Standard
22834 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22838 \begin_inset space ~
22843 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22846 \begin_layout Standard
22847 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22848 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22851 \begin_layout Standard
22852 This is a line with an inline formula
22853 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22859 \begin_layout Standard
22860 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22861 paragraph, like this one:
22862 \begin_inset Formula
22869 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22872 \begin_layout Standard
22874 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22876 For example, typing
22877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22890 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22891 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22895 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22898 \begin_inset space ~
22906 \begin_layout Subsection
22907 Navigating in Formulas
22908 \begin_inset Index idx
22911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22920 \begin_layout Standard
22921 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22922 achieved with the arrow keys.
22924 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22925 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22930 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22931 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22935 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22939 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22942 \end{array}\right]$
22950 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22955 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22956 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22959 \begin_layout Standard
22964 , printed in this document as
22965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22969 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22976 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22977 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22978 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22983 For example, if you want
22984 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22992 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23002 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23006 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23011 , since in the latter case only the
23014 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23019 will be under the square root sign:
23020 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23026 \begin_layout Standard
23027 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23029 \begin_inset Formula
23031 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23040 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23041 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23044 \begin_layout Subsection
23048 \begin_layout Standard
23049 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23050 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23054 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23055 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23056 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23057 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23058 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23062 \begin_layout Subsection
23063 Exponents and Subscripts
23064 \begin_inset Index idx
23067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23074 \begin_inset Index idx
23077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23086 \begin_layout Standard
23087 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23090 arg "math-superscript"
23096 arg "math-subscript"
23099 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23101 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23104 , type in a formula
23107 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23117 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23123 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23127 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23133 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23139 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23148 , you have to use an extra
23152 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23153 For example, if you want
23154 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23160 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23166 Subscripts are similar: To get
23167 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23173 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23181 \begin_layout Subsection
23183 \begin_inset Index idx
23186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23195 \begin_layout Standard
23196 Create a fraction either with the command
23202 or by using the icon
23205 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23211 \begin_inset space ~
23217 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23218 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23219 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23224 To move back up, press
23229 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23230 \begin_inset Formula
23232 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23235 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23243 \begin_layout Subsection
23245 \begin_inset Index idx
23248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23257 \begin_layout Standard
23258 Roots can be created using the
23261 \begin_inset space ~
23269 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23275 arg "math-insert \\root"
23297 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23303 always produces a square root.
23306 \begin_layout Subsection
23307 Operators with Limits
23308 \begin_inset Index idx
23311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23318 \begin_inset Index idx
23321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23330 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23337 \begin_layout Standard
23339 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23343 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23346 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23347 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23348 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23349 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23350 The sum operator will automatically place its
23351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23358 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23360 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23364 \begin_inset Formula
23366 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23371 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23375 \begin_layout Standard
23376 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23378 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23379 behind the operator and using the menu
23381 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23382 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23384 \begin_inset space ~
23388 \begin_inset space ~
23402 \begin_layout Standard
23403 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23412 \begin_inset Index idx
23415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23422 \begin_inset Formula
23424 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23429 which will place the
23430 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23442 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23443 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23449 \begin_layout Standard
23450 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23457 Have a look at section
23458 \begin_inset space ~
23462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23464 reference "subsec:Functions"
23468 for an explanation of function macros.
23471 \begin_layout Subsection
23473 \begin_inset Index idx
23476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23485 \begin_layout Standard
23486 Most math symbols can be found in the
23489 \begin_inset space ~
23494 under one of several categories; including
23511 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23515 \begin_layout Standard
23516 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23517 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23518 don't have to use the
23521 \begin_inset space ~
23526 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23528 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23531 \begin_layout Subsection
23533 \begin_inset Index idx
23536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23545 \begin_layout Standard
23546 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23552 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23558 \begin_inset space ~
23566 arg "math-insert \\space"
23570 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23571 For example, the sequence
23576 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23579 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23581 \begin_inset Graphics
23582 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23587 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23588 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23589 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23590 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23591 , because they are negative
23593 Here are two examples:
23596 \begin_layout Standard
23606 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23612 \begin_layout Standard
23622 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23628 \begin_layout Subsection
23630 \begin_inset Index idx
23633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23642 name "subsec:Functions"
23649 \begin_layout Standard
23653 \begin_inset space ~
23658 contains under the button
23661 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23664 a number of function macros, such as
23665 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23669 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23677 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23684 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23685 avoid confusions, because
23686 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23690 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23696 \begin_layout Standard
23697 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23699 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23703 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23709 \begin_layout Standard
23710 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23711 are placed, as described in section
23712 \begin_inset space ~
23716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23718 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23725 \begin_layout Subsection
23727 \begin_inset Index idx
23730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23739 \begin_layout Standard
23740 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23742 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23743 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23744 commands, for example, to enter
23745 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23748 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23749 Our example is entered by typing
23754 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23761 \begin_inset space ~
23765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23767 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23771 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23774 \begin_layout Standard
23775 \begin_inset Float table
23780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23781 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23786 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23790 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23800 \begin_inset Tabular
23801 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23802 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23803 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23804 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23805 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23889 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23997 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24051 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24105 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24159 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24267 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24321 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24366 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24387 \begin_layout Standard
24388 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24391 \begin_inset space ~
24399 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24402 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24406 \begin_layout Section
24407 Brackets and Delimiters
24408 \begin_inset Index idx
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24418 \begin_inset Index idx
24421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24430 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24437 \begin_layout Standard
24438 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24440 For some purposes, using just the keys
24445 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24446 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24447 toolbar delimiter icon
24450 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24454 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24455 \begin_inset Formula
24457 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24465 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24466 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24470 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24473 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24479 \begin_inset Formula
24481 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24489 \begin_layout Standard
24490 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24491 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24495 \begin_layout Standard
24496 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24497 left side and right side.
24498 If you use the option
24501 \begin_inset space ~
24506 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24507 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24509 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24514 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24515 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24518 \begin_layout Standard
24519 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24520 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24521 is to go inside the brackets.
24522 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24527 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24528 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24529 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24533 arg "math-delim ( )"
24539 \begin_layout Section
24540 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24541 \begin_inset Index idx
24544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24551 \begin_inset Index idx
24554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24561 \begin_inset Index idx
24564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24565 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24573 \begin_layout Standard
24574 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24578 \begin_inset space ~
24586 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24590 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24591 Here is an example:
24592 \begin_inset Formula
24594 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24603 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24604 \begin_inset space ~
24608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24610 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24615 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24616 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24617 This alignment is set in the box
24622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24671 for every column as default.
24672 For example, the sequence
24673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24684 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24685 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24686 corresponds to the relevant column.
24687 The result will look like this:
24688 \begin_inset Formula
24691 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24692 column & has & has\,right\\
24693 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24702 \begin_layout Standard
24703 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24706 arg "newline-insert newline"
24709 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24710 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24712 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24715 or the math toolbar.
24718 \begin_layout Standard
24719 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24720 It can be created with the menu
24722 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24723 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24725 \begin_inset space ~
24737 Here is an example:
24738 \begin_inset Formula
24752 \begin_layout Standard
24753 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24756 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24759 arg "newline-insert newline"
24763 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24768 arg "newline-insert newline"
24771 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24779 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24780 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24781 A new row is created by every further entry of
24784 arg "newline-insert newline"
24788 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24789 Here is an example:
24790 \begin_inset Formula
24792 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24793 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24798 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24799 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24800 \begin_inset Formula
24802 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24810 \begin_layout Standard
24811 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24818 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24819 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24822 reference "eq:asquared"
24827 The other types are described in section
24828 \begin_inset space ~
24832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24834 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24841 \begin_layout Section
24842 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24843 \begin_inset Index idx
24846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24847 Math ! Formula numbering
24853 \begin_inset Index idx
24856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24857 Math ! Referencing formulas
24863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24865 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24872 \begin_layout Standard
24873 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24875 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24876 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24878 \begin_inset space ~
24882 \begin_inset space ~
24890 arg "math-number-toggle"
24894 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24895 within parentheses.
24896 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24897 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24898 the document class.
24899 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24900 separated by a dot:
24901 \begin_inset Formula
24911 arg "math-number-toggle"
24914 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24915 You can only number displayed formulas.
24918 \begin_layout Standard
24919 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24921 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24922 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24924 \begin_inset space ~
24928 \begin_inset space ~
24936 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24939 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24940 \begin_inset Formula
24943 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24949 To number all lines use the shortcut
24952 arg "math-number-toggle"
24958 \begin_layout Standard
24959 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24962 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24963 A label is inserted with the menu
24965 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24974 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24975 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24976 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24988 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24989 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24990 We inserted in the following example the label
24991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24998 in the second line:
24999 \begin_inset Formula
25001 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25002 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25007 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25008 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25009 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25011 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25013 \begin_inset space ~
25021 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25025 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25026 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25027 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25028 as the formula number:
25031 \begin_layout Standard
25032 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25035 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25042 \begin_layout Standard
25043 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25044 's cross-reference box are described in section
25045 \begin_inset space ~
25049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25051 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25056 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25064 \begin_layout Section
25065 User defined math macros
25066 \begin_inset Index idx
25069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25078 \begin_layout Standard
25080 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25081 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25082 Math macros are explained in section
25085 \begin_inset space ~
25097 \begin_layout Section
25101 \begin_layout Subsection
25103 \begin_inset Index idx
25106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25115 \begin_layout Standard
25116 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25117 To set a font in a formula, use the
25120 \begin_inset space ~
25128 arg "math-insert \\font"
25131 , or enter its command, listed in table
25132 \begin_inset space ~
25136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25138 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25145 \begin_layout Standard
25146 \begin_inset Float table
25151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25152 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25157 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25161 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25171 \begin_inset Tabular
25172 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25173 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25174 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25175 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25207 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25234 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25261 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25294 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25321 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25348 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25382 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25409 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25443 \begin_layout Standard
25444 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25452 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25468 \begin_layout Standard
25469 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25470 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25475 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25476 space when you need a space in the box.
25477 Here is an example where
25478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25489 denotes the set of numbers:
25490 \begin_inset Formula
25492 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25500 \begin_layout Standard
25501 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25502 You can, for example, put a character in
25511 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25515 \begin_inset Newline newline
25518 So it is better not to use this feature.
25521 \begin_layout Standard
25522 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25523 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25527 \begin_inset Newline newline
25530 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25536 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25537 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25543 \begin_layout Standard
25550 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25553 \begin_layout Standard
25554 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25556 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25557 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25559 \begin_inset space ~
25567 \begin_layout Subsection
25569 \begin_inset Index idx
25572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25581 \begin_layout Standard
25582 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25584 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25588 \begin_inset space ~
25592 \begin_inset space ~
25600 \begin_inset space ~
25608 arg "math-insert \\font"
25612 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25613 in black instead of blue.
25614 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25615 Here is an example:
25616 \begin_inset Formula
25619 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25620 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25629 \begin_layout Subsection
25631 \begin_inset Index idx
25634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25643 \begin_layout Standard
25644 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25645 automatically chosen in most situations.
25663 For most characters,
25671 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25672 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25677 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25678 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25679 thinks are appropriate.
25680 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25683 arg "math-insert \\style"
25687 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25688 For example, you can set
25689 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25692 , which is normally in
25701 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25705 The four styles are used in the following example:
25708 \begin_layout Standard
25709 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25713 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25717 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25721 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25727 \begin_layout Standard
25728 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25729 is set in a particular size with the menu
25731 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25733 \begin_inset space ~
25738 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25739 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25740 will be adjusted to correspond.
25741 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25752 \begin_layout Standard
25756 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25762 \begin_layout Section
25763 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25765 \begin_inset Index idx
25768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25775 \begin_inset Index idx
25778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25787 \begin_layout Standard
25789 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25790 that are in common use.
25793 \begin_layout Subsection
25794 Enabling AMS-Support
25797 \begin_layout Standard
25798 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25799 the document by selecting the checkbox
25802 \begin_inset space ~
25806 \begin_inset space ~
25810 \begin_inset space ~
25817 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25821 \begin_inset Index idx
25824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25825 Document ! Settings
25833 \begin_inset space ~
25839 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25840 -errors in formulas,
25841 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25844 \begin_layout Subsection
25846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25848 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25853 \begin_inset Index idx
25856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25857 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25865 \begin_layout Standard
25866 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25867 provides a selection of different formula types.
25869 allows you to choose between
25890 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25891 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25897 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25900 \begin_layout Chapter
25904 \begin_layout Section
25906 \begin_inset Index idx
25909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25918 name "sec:Cross-References"
25925 \begin_layout Standard
25926 One of \SpecialChar LyX
25927 's strengths is cross-references.
25928 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25930 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25931 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25932 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25935 \begin_layout Enumerate
25939 \begin_layout Enumerate
25940 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25942 name "enu:Second-item"
25949 \begin_layout Enumerate
25953 \begin_layout Standard
25954 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25956 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25959 or by pressing the toolbar button
25966 A gray label box like this:
25967 \begin_inset Graphics
25968 filename clipart/label.png
25973 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25975 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26010 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26011 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26027 \begin_layout Standard
26028 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26030 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26033 or the toolbar button
26036 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26040 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26041 \begin_inset Graphics
26042 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26047 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26049 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26062 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26066 \begin_layout Standard
26067 As an alternative to
26069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26072 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26077 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26078 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26080 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26092 \begin_layout Standard
26093 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26094 \begin_inset space ~
26098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26100 reference "enu:Second-item"
26107 \begin_layout Standard
26108 It is recommended to use a protected space
26112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26113 described in section
26114 \begin_inset space ~
26118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26120 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26129 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26130 line breaks between them.
26133 \begin_layout Standard
26134 There are six formats of cross-references:
26137 \begin_layout Description
26138 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26141 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26148 \begin_layout Description
26149 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26150 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26162 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26169 \begin_layout Description
26170 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26171 \begin_inset space ~
26175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26176 LatexCommand pageref
26177 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26184 \begin_layout Description
26186 \begin_inset space ~
26190 \begin_inset space ~
26193 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26195 LatexCommand vpageref
26196 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26201 \begin_inset Newline newline
26204 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26205 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26206 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26207 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26208 it prints “on the next page”.
26209 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26212 \begin_layout Description
26214 \begin_inset space ~
26218 \begin_inset space ~
26222 \begin_inset space ~
26225 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26228 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26233 \begin_inset Newline newline
26236 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26242 ; otherwise it behaves like
26246 \begin_inset space ~
26250 \begin_inset space ~
26259 \begin_layout Description
26261 \begin_inset space ~
26264 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26265 \begin_inset Newline newline
26269 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26277 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26287 \begin_inset Index idx
26290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26292 -packages ! prettyref
26298 \begin_inset Index idx
26301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26303 -packages ! refstyle
26314 \begin_inset Newline newline
26317 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26318 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26321 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26325 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26326 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26334 is the default and preferred because
26338 supports only English documents.
26339 The format is specified by using the command
26351 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26352 preamble of the document.
26353 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26366 ) can be done with this command
26367 \begin_inset Newline newline
26374 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26379 \begin_inset Newline newline
26382 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26384 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26386 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26393 \begin_layout Description
26395 \begin_inset space ~
26398 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26400 LatexCommand nameref
26401 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26408 \begin_layout Standard
26409 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26410 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26412 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26416 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26420 \begin_layout Standard
26421 You can only use the style
26425 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26429 is always possible.
26432 \begin_layout Standard
26433 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26434 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26436 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26437 \begin_inset space ~
26441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26443 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26450 \begin_layout Standard
26451 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26455 \begin_inset space ~
26459 \begin_inset space ~
26464 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26465 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26468 \begin_inset space ~
26473 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26474 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26477 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26483 \begin_layout Standard
26484 You can change labels at any time.
26485 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26486 do not need to think about this.
26489 \begin_layout Standard
26490 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26492 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26496 \begin_layout Standard
26497 References are described in detail in the section
26498 \begin_inset space ~
26502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26512 \begin_inset space ~
26520 \begin_layout Section
26521 Table of Contents and other Listings
26522 \begin_inset Index idx
26525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26532 \begin_inset Index idx
26535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26551 \begin_layout Subsection
26553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26555 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26562 \begin_layout Standard
26563 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26565 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26566 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26568 \begin_inset space ~
26572 \begin_inset space ~
26578 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26580 If you click on it, the
26584 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26585 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26586 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26588 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26590 \begin_inset space ~
26595 that is described in section
26596 \begin_inset space ~
26600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26602 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26609 \begin_layout Standard
26610 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26611 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26613 \begin_inset space ~
26617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26619 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26623 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26625 \begin_inset space ~
26629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26631 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26635 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26637 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26640 \begin_layout Subsection
26641 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26644 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26651 \begin_layout Standard
26652 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26654 You can insert them via the
26656 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26660 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26663 \begin_layout Section
26664 URLs and Hyperlinks
26665 \begin_inset Index idx
26668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26675 \begin_inset Index idx
26678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26687 \begin_layout Subsection
26689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26698 \begin_layout Standard
26699 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26707 \begin_layout Standard
26708 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26710 \begin_inset Flex URL
26713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26723 \begin_layout Standard
26724 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26730 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26734 \begin_layout Standard
26735 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26743 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26752 \begin_layout Subsection
26754 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26756 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26763 \begin_layout Standard
26764 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26769 or with the toolbar button
26776 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26785 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26786 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26787 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26789 name "LyX's homepage"
26790 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26794 , an Email address like this:
26795 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26797 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26798 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26803 , or a link to a file.
26806 \begin_layout Standard
26807 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26820 to the link target.
26823 \begin_layout Standard
26824 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26825 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26826 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26827 the text style dialog.
26828 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26832 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26834 name "LyX's homepage"
26835 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26842 \begin_layout Standard
26843 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26847 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26849 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26850 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26854 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26856 \begin_inset Newline newline
26864 \begin_inset Newline newline
26871 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26874 \begin_layout Section
26876 \begin_inset Index idx
26879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26888 name "sec:Appendices"
26895 \begin_layout Standard
26896 Appendices are created with the menu
26898 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26900 \begin_inset space ~
26904 \begin_inset space ~
26910 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26911 as the appendix part of the book.
26912 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26915 \begin_layout Standard
26916 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26917 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26918 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26919 and the subsection number.
26920 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26924 \begin_layout Standard
26926 \begin_inset space ~
26930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26932 reference "chap:Credits"
26937 \begin_inset space ~
26941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26943 reference "subsec:Export"
26950 \begin_layout Section
26952 \begin_inset Index idx
26955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26964 name "sec:Bibliography"
26971 \begin_layout Standard
26972 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26974 You can include a bibliography database,
26978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26979 Known under the name
26980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26983 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26993 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26994 manually, using the paragraph environment
26998 , which was described in section
26999 \begin_inset space ~
27003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27005 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27010 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27011 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27015 use a bibliography database.
27018 \begin_layout Subsection
27019 The Bibliography Environment
27022 \begin_layout Standard
27027 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27029 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27038 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27040 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27050 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27053 \begin_layout Standard
27054 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27056 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27059 or the toolbar button
27062 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27066 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27067 containing the available citations.
27068 Select one or more keys from the list and
27078 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27079 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27083 \begin_layout Standard
27084 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27085 entry with surrounding brackets.
27090 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27091 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27103 \begin_layout Standard
27107 Companion Second Edition
27110 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27112 key "latexcompanion"
27119 \begin_layout Standard
27120 The \SpecialChar LyX
27121 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27122 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27131 \begin_layout Standard
27132 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27135 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27137 \begin_inset space ~
27145 arg "layout-paragraph"
27149 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27152 \begin_layout Subsection
27153 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27155 \begin_inset Index idx
27158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27159 Bibliography ! Databases
27165 \begin_inset Index idx
27168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27169 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27178 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27185 \begin_layout Standard
27186 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27192 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27194 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27195 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27200 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27202 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27203 your working field in a database.
27204 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27205 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27206 list for that document.
27207 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27211 \begin_layout Standard
27212 The database is a text file with the file extension
27213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27224 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27225 The format is explained in
27226 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27232 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27234 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27236 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27241 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27242 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27243 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27245 \begin_inset Flex URL
27248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27250 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27258 \begin_layout Standard
27259 To use a database, use the menu
27261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27266 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27268 \begin_inset space ~
27274 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27275 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27282 Add bibliography to TOC
27284 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27289 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27290 in the document or just the cited references.
27293 \begin_layout Standard
27294 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27306 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27307 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27308 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27309 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27311 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27317 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27318 \begin_inset Newline newline
27322 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27324 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27336 \begin_layout Standard
27337 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27340 \begin_layout Standard
27341 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27342 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27344 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27351 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27352 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27357 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27358 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27359 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27363 The following variants are possible:
27366 \begin_layout Description
27367 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27368 with other bibliography packages (e.
27369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27373 \begin_inset space \space{}
27380 ), only with the package
27384 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27388 \begin_layout Description
27389 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27390 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27391 with all bibliography packages, except
27396 \begin_layout Description
27397 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27402 , works with all bibliography packages
27405 \begin_layout Standard
27406 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27407 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27409 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27412 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27416 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27425 \begin_layout Standard
27426 When you select the option
27428 Sectioned bibliography
27432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27433 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27436 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27437 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27439 Customizing Bibliographies
27443 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27448 Additional Features
27453 \begin_layout Standard
27454 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27455 the two methods of creating them.
27456 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27457 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27458 We used the style file
27462 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27465 \begin_layout Subsection
27467 \begin_inset Index idx
27470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27471 Bibliography ! Citation format
27479 \begin_layout Standard
27480 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27481 For this feature you need to enable the option
27487 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27491 \begin_inset Index idx
27494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27495 Document ! Settings
27505 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27506 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27507 style files as explained in
27508 the previous section.
27511 \begin_layout Standard
27512 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27513 the citation reference window.
27514 Here is an example where the text
27515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27519 \begin_inset space ~
27523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27526 appears after the reference:
27529 \begin_layout Standard
27531 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27534 key "latexcompanion"
27541 \begin_layout Section
27543 \begin_inset Index idx
27546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27562 \begin_layout Standard
27563 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27565 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27567 \begin_inset space ~
27572 or the toolbar button
27579 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27580 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27581 by \SpecialChar LyX
27582 as the index entry.
27585 \begin_layout Standard
27586 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27588 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27589 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27591 \begin_inset space ~
27597 A light blue box labeled
27598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27609 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27610 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27614 \begin_layout Standard
27615 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27616 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27617 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27618 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27620 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27622 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27629 \begin_layout Subsection
27630 Grouping Index Entries
27631 \begin_inset Index idx
27634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27643 \begin_layout Standard
27644 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27646 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27647 lists under the entry
27648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27656 First we create the entry
27657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27665 \begin_inset space ~
27669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27671 reference "subsec:Lists"
27676 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27677 \begin_inset space ~
27681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27683 reference "sec:Itemize"
27687 , we insert the command
27690 \begin_layout Standard
27696 \begin_layout Standard
27700 \begin_layout Standard
27706 \begin_layout Standard
27707 for the enumerated list in section
27708 \begin_inset space ~
27712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27714 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27721 \begin_layout Standard
27722 The exclamation mark
27723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27730 marks the grouping levels.
27731 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27732 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27733 If we don't have an index entry for
27734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27741 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27744 \begin_layout Subsection
27746 \begin_inset Index idx
27749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27750 Index ! Page ranges
27758 \begin_layout Standard
27759 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27761 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27762 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27763 an index entry in section
27764 \begin_inset space ~
27768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27770 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27777 \begin_layout Standard
27780 Paragraph environments|(
27783 \begin_layout Standard
27784 and another entry at the end of section
27785 \begin_inset space ~
27789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27791 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27798 \begin_layout Standard
27801 Paragraph environments|)
27804 \begin_layout Standard
27806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27829 respectively start and end the index range.
27830 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27831 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27832 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27833 An example is the index entry
27834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27837 Document ! Settings
27838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27844 \begin_layout Subsection
27846 \begin_inset Index idx
27849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27850 Index ! Cross referencing
27858 \begin_layout Standard
27859 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27860 We referred for example in the index entry
27861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27869 \begin_inset space ~
27873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27875 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
27879 ) to the index entry
27880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27887 in the same section using the entry
27890 \begin_layout Standard
27893 GIF|see{Image formats}
27896 \begin_layout Standard
27897 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
27899 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27900 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27903 \begin_layout Subsection
27905 \begin_inset Index idx
27908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27909 Index ! Entry order
27917 \begin_layout Standard
27918 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27919 follow the rules for the index order.
27920 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
27925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27926 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27928 \begin_inset space ~
27932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27934 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27943 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27944 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27969 \begin_inset Index idx
27972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27973 Dummy entries ! maïs
27979 \begin_inset Index idx
27982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27983 Dummy entries ! maître
27989 \begin_inset Index idx
27992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27993 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27998 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27999 maïs, maison, maître.
28000 To achieve this, we use the command
28003 \begin_layout Standard
28006 previous entry@current entry
28009 \begin_layout Standard
28010 In our case we want to have
28011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28026 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28029 \begin_layout Standard
28035 \begin_layout Standard
28036 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28037 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28039 See the next subsection for an example.
28042 \begin_layout Standard
28043 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28049 \begin_layout Standard
28050 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28055 to generate the index (see sec.
28056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28062 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28071 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28072 -package aeguill in sec.
28073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28079 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28083 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28084 -packages although all these index
28085 commands start with
28086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28099 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28104 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28107 \begin_layout Standard
28119 \begin_layout Standard
28131 \begin_layout Subsection
28133 \begin_inset Index idx
28136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28137 Index ! Entry layout
28145 \begin_layout Standard
28146 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28147 \begin_inset Index idx
28150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28153 This is an italic dummy entry
28158 You can also format the page number using the character
28159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28166 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28167 -command without a backslash.
28168 We can write for example
28171 \begin_layout Standard
28174 italic page number:|textit
28177 \begin_layout Standard
28178 to get the page number in italic.
28179 \begin_inset Index idx
28182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28183 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28188 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28189 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28207 \begin_inset space ~
28213 Have a look at section
28214 \begin_inset space ~
28218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28220 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28224 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28228 \begin_layout Standard
28229 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28237 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28241 to generate the index, see sec.
28242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28248 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28257 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28262 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28263 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28266 key "latexcompanion"
28278 \begin_layout Standard
28279 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28281 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28282 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28283 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28284 If so, put the following in the preamble
28287 \begin_layout Standard
28299 \begin_layout Standard
28303 \begin_layout Standard
28309 \begin_layout Standard
28310 in the index entry.
28311 \begin_inset Index idx
28314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28315 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28320 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28321 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28322 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28325 \begin_layout Standard
28326 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28327 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28328 a bold font for all index entries.
28329 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28341 documentation for details,
28342 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28344 key "makeindex,xindy"
28351 \begin_layout Subsection
28353 \begin_inset Index idx
28356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28365 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28372 \begin_layout Standard
28373 If the index generation program
28377 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28378 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28382 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28383 distribution, is used.
28387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28392 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28393 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28394 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28395 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28396 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28406 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28408 dialog, see section
28409 \begin_inset space ~
28413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28415 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28420 The available options are listed and explained in
28421 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28423 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28428 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28432 \begin_layout Standard
28433 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28434 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28437 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28438 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28442 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28443 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28446 \begin_layout Subsection
28450 \begin_layout Standard
28451 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28452 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28460 next to the standard index.
28462 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28463 that add this feature.
28470 \begin_inset Index idx
28473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28475 -packages ! splitidx
28480 package to generate multiple indexes.
28481 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28487 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28489 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28496 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28497 style, but it also includes
28498 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28499 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28507 \begin_layout Standard
28508 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28509 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28511 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28512 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28515 and select the option
28517 Use multiple Indexes
28524 already contains the standard index
28525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28533 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28534 also appear as a heading) to the
28538 input field and press the
28543 The new index now also appears in the list.
28544 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28545 label color to the new index.
28548 \begin_layout Standard
28549 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28552 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28559 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28560 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28561 are additional features:
28564 \begin_layout Itemize
28565 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28566 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28569 \begin_layout Itemize
28570 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28571 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28579 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28580 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28581 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28582 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28585 \begin_layout Section
28586 Nomenclature/Glossary
28587 \begin_inset Index idx
28590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28597 \begin_inset Index idx
28600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28631 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28638 \begin_layout Standard
28639 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28640 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28641 called nomenclature or glossary.
28644 \begin_layout Standard
28645 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28652 \begin_inset Index idx
28655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28657 -packages ! nomencl
28663 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28665 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28671 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28675 \begin_layout Standard
28676 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28677 and then use the menu
28679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28685 \begin_inset space ~
28690 or the toolbar button
28693 arg "nomencl-insert"
28698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28709 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28712 \begin_layout Standard
28713 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28714 The first is the term or
28718 that you wish to define.
28723 of the term or symbol.
28726 \begin_layout Standard
28727 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28735 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28736 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28744 \begin_layout Subsection
28745 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28746 \begin_inset Index idx
28749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28750 Nomenclature ! Layout
28758 \begin_layout Standard
28759 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28763 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28770 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28778 \begin_inset Newline newline
28786 \begin_inset Newline newline
28792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28799 character starts/ends the formula.
28800 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28801 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28813 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28823 \begin_layout Standard
28824 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28825 -syntax is given in section
28826 \begin_inset space ~
28830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28832 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28839 \begin_layout Standard
28843 \begin_inset space ~
28848 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28850 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28855 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28862 in this document is:
28863 \begin_inset Newline newline
28868 dummy entry for the character
28873 \begin_inset Newline newline
28885 \begin_inset space ~
28895 font use the command
28924 \begin_layout Standard
28925 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
28926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28930 \begin_inset space \space{}
28934 \begin_inset Newline newline
28950 \begin_inset Newline newline
28953 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
28954 This command will make the font of all symbols
28961 \begin_inset space ~
28969 \begin_layout Standard
28970 If the characters |
28971 \begin_inset space \space{}
28975 \begin_inset space \space{}
28979 \begin_inset space \space{}
28983 \begin_inset space \space{}
28987 \begin_inset space \space{}
28990 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28991 a quote character in front of them.
28992 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28993 LatexCommand nomenclature
28994 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28995 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29002 \begin_layout Subsection
29003 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29004 \begin_inset Index idx
29007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29008 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29016 \begin_layout Standard
29017 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29018 -code of the symbol
29020 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29022 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29025 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29026 LatexCommand nomenclature
29028 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29035 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29039 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29040 LatexCommand nomenclature
29043 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29048 They will be sorted by
29049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29075 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29078 will be sorted before the
29082 since the character
29083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29090 is considered in sorting.
29093 \begin_layout Standard
29094 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29097 \begin_inset space ~
29102 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29103 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29105 For the example given, you can insert
29109 in this field for the
29110 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29117 will be located before
29118 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29124 \begin_layout Standard
29125 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29130 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29139 \begin_layout Subsection
29140 Nomenclature Options
29141 \begin_inset Index idx
29144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29145 Nomenclature ! Options
29153 \begin_layout Standard
29158 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29159 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29162 \begin_layout Description
29163 refeq Appends the phrase
29164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29179 to every nomenclature entry, where
29185 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29188 \begin_layout Description
29189 refpage Appends the phrase
29190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29205 to every nomenclature entry, where
29211 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29214 \begin_layout Description
29215 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29218 \begin_layout Standard
29219 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29220 class options list in the
29222 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29226 In this document the options
29233 \begin_layout Standard
29234 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29240 \begin_layout Standard
29241 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29242 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29247 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29250 \begin_layout Description
29260 \begin_layout Description
29263 nomrefpage Like the
29270 \begin_layout Description
29273 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29282 \begin_layout Description
29286 \begin_inset space ~
29292 \begin_inset space ~
29297 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29300 \begin_layout Standard
29302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29309 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29310 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29314 \begin_layout Standard
29322 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29325 \begin_inset Newline newline
29332 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29337 \begin_inset Newline newline
29341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29356 by their translation.
29359 \begin_layout Subsection
29360 Printing the Nomenclature
29361 \begin_inset Index idx
29364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29365 Nomenclature ! Printing
29373 \begin_layout Standard
29374 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29376 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29377 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29393 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29394 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29395 You can choose between these settings:
29398 \begin_layout Description
29399 Default a space of 1
29400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29406 \begin_layout Description
29408 \begin_inset space ~
29412 \begin_inset space ~
29415 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29418 \begin_layout Description
29419 Custom custom space
29422 \begin_layout Standard
29423 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29432 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29440 For example, in order to change the name to
29444 , add the following line to the preamble:
29447 \begin_layout Standard
29455 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29458 \begin_layout Subsection
29459 Nomenclature Program
29460 \begin_inset Index idx
29463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29464 Nomenclature ! Program
29470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29472 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29479 \begin_layout Standard
29485 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29486 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29488 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29493 by adding options, see section
29494 \begin_inset space ~
29498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29500 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29505 The available options are listed and explained in
29506 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29508 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29515 \begin_layout Section
29517 \begin_inset Index idx
29520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29527 \begin_inset Index idx
29530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29531 Document ! Branches
29537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29539 name "sec:Branches"
29546 \begin_layout Standard
29547 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29548 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29549 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29550 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29553 \begin_layout Standard
29554 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29555 allows you to put text into branches.
29556 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29557 To create a branch, either select the menu
29559 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29560 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29563 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29565 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29572 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29573 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29574 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29575 and whether the name of the branch should
29576 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29577 (see below for an example).
29578 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29579 to the name of the other) and to add
29580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29592 \begin_inset space ~
29595 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29596 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29599 \begin_layout Standard
29600 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29601 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29603 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29606 where you can choose a branch.
29607 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29611 \begin_layout Standard
29612 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29613 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29616 \begin_layout Standard
29617 \begin_inset Branch Question
29620 \begin_layout Standard
29621 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29629 \begin_layout Standard
29630 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29633 \begin_layout Standard
29634 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29642 \begin_layout Standard
29649 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29650 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29653 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29654 Consider for example a file
29655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29662 which has the above branches.
29664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29671 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29695 branch were inactive,
29696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29711 branch was active, likewise
29712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29727 branch was active, and
29728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29731 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29735 if both branches were active.
29736 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29739 \begin_layout Standard
29740 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29746 \begin_layout Standard
29747 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29748 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29749 definitions for each branch.
29750 For example you can define for the question branch
29754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29755 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29756 -syntax, see section
29757 \begin_inset space ~
29761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29763 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29775 \begin_layout Standard
29785 \begin_layout Standard
29795 \begin_layout Standard
29796 and for the answer branch
29799 \begin_layout Standard
29809 \begin_layout Standard
29819 \begin_layout Standard
29820 \begin_inset Branch Question
29823 \begin_layout Standard
29827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29855 \begin_layout Standard
29856 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29859 \begin_layout Standard
29863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29891 \begin_layout Standard
29892 Now it is possible to use the
29896 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29903 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29906 commands to obtain conditional output.
29907 Here is an example formula where only the
29914 \begin_inset Formula
29916 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29924 \begin_layout Standard
29925 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29933 \begin_layout Standard
29934 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29936 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29940 \begin_inset space \space{}
29943 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29945 For this advanced usage, see the
29950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29953 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29960 \begin_layout Section
29962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29964 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29969 \begin_inset Index idx
29972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29981 \begin_layout Standard
29984 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29985 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29988 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29990 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29996 \begin_inset Index idx
29999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30001 -packages ! hyperref
30006 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30007 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30008 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30009 part of the document.
30013 \begin_layout Standard
30014 The header information in the dialog tab
30018 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30019 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30020 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30021 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30025 \begin_inset space ~
30029 \begin_inset space ~
30034 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30035 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30036 and author entries.
30040 \begin_inset space ~
30044 \begin_inset space ~
30048 \begin_inset space ~
30053 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30056 \begin_layout Standard
30057 You can specify in the dialog tab
30061 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30066 \begin_inset space ~
30070 \begin_inset space ~
30074 \begin_inset space ~
30079 option allows long links to be split;
30082 \begin_inset space ~
30086 \begin_inset space ~
30090 \begin_inset space ~
30098 \begin_inset space ~
30103 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30106 \begin_inset space ~
30111 colors the different links.
30112 The default colors are:
30115 \begin_layout Labeling
30116 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30121 for hyperlinks and URLs
30124 \begin_layout Labeling
30125 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30133 \begin_layout Labeling
30134 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30142 \begin_layout Standard
30143 but you can change these in the field
30148 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30151 \begin_layout Standard
30154 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30157 \begin_layout Standard
30162 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30163 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30164 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30167 \begin_layout Standard
30172 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30173 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30174 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30184 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30185 when opening the PDF.
30187 \begin_inset space ~
30190 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30191 \begin_inset space ~
30194 1 will only display the sections.
30197 \begin_layout Standard
30198 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30199 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30205 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30206 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30215 \begin_layout Section
30217 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30221 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30228 \begin_layout Subsection
30231 \begin_inset Index idx
30234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30244 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30251 \begin_layout Standard
30252 As \SpecialChar LyX
30253 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30254 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30255 commands and constructs,
30258 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30259 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30260 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30261 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30262 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30263 cannot support all packages and
30267 \begin_layout Standard
30268 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30269 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30270 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30274 Code box is created by the menu
30276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30278 \begin_inset space ~
30283 or by the toolbar button
30296 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30304 \begin_layout Standard
30305 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30307 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30309 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30310 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30317 , you can write the command part
30323 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30324 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30328 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30329 Code box behind the word.
30330 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30331 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30335 \begin_layout Standard
30336 \begin_inset Graphics
30337 filename clipart/ERT.png
30345 \begin_layout Standard
30349 \begin_layout Standard
30350 This is a line with a
30354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30377 \begin_layout Standard
30378 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30386 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30387 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30388 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30389 know that the command is finished.
30397 \begin_layout Subsection
30398 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30400 \begin_inset Argument 1
30403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30404 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30411 \begin_inset Index idx
30414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30424 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30431 \begin_layout Standard
30432 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30433 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30434 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30435 uses in the background.
30436 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30437 is based on commands, you can
30438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30446 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30447 any time if you know the right commands.
30448 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30449 is the end of the day.
30450 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30451 all caption labels bold.
30452 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30454 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30458 \begin_layout Standard
30459 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30461 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30463 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30466 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30475 \begin_layout Standard
30476 As result you find that the package
30481 \begin_inset Index idx
30484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30486 -packages ! caption
30492 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30494 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30497 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30501 \begin_inset space ~
30509 \begin_layout Standard
30514 usepackage[options]{package name}
30517 \begin_layout Standard
30518 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30519 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30520 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30521 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30524 \begin_layout Standard
30525 In your case the package name is
30530 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30535 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30536 So you add the command
30539 \begin_layout Standard
30544 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30547 \begin_layout Standard
30548 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30553 For more commands provided by the
30557 package, have a look at its documentation,
30558 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30572 \begin_layout Standard
30573 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30575 For example if you use a
30579 class, you don't need the package
30583 , you can instead write
30586 \begin_layout Standard
30591 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30596 \begin_layout Standard
30597 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30598 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30599 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30606 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30609 \begin_layout Standard
30610 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30611 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30613 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30614 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30615 Code box as described in the previous
30619 \begin_layout Standard
30620 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30621 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30624 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30626 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30633 \begin_layout Standard
30634 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30640 \begin_layout Standard
30644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30654 \begin_inset Note Note
30657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30658 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30666 \begin_layout Left Header
30667 \begin_inset Argument 1
30670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30690 \begin_inset Note Note
30693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30694 defines the header line as described below
30702 \begin_layout Center Header
30703 \begin_inset Argument 1
30706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30715 \begin_layout Right Header
30716 \begin_inset Argument 1
30719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30740 \begin_layout Left Footer
30741 \begin_inset Argument 1
30744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30765 \begin_layout Center Footer
30766 \begin_inset Argument 1
30769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30781 \begin_inset Newline newline
30785 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30791 \begin_layout Right Footer
30792 \begin_inset Argument 1
30795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30817 \begin_layout Section
30818 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30821 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30826 \begin_inset Index idx
30829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30830 Document ! Header/Footer line
30836 \begin_inset Index idx
30839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30848 \begin_layout Standard
30849 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30853 \begin_inset space ~
30864 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30870 \begin_inset space ~
30876 As a second step add in the menu
30878 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30879 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30886 Custom Header/Footerlines
30887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30891 This module offers the following 6
30892 \begin_inset space ~
30898 \begin_layout Description
30900 \begin_inset space ~
30904 \begin_inset space ~
30908 \begin_inset space ~
30912 \begin_inset space ~
30916 \begin_inset space ~
30922 \begin_layout Description
30924 \begin_inset space ~
30928 \begin_inset space ~
30932 \begin_inset space ~
30936 \begin_inset space ~
30940 \begin_inset space ~
30946 \begin_layout Standard
30947 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30950 \begin_layout Standard
30951 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30952 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30954 \begin_inset space ~
30958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30960 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30964 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30967 \begin_layout Standard
30968 \begin_inset Float figure
30974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30977 \begin_inset Tabular
30978 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30979 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30980 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30981 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30982 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30984 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31002 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31013 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31031 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31042 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31046 The normal text on the page goes here.
31047 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31049 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31050 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31055 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31064 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31075 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31093 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31104 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31122 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31140 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31145 name "fig:Page-layout"
31149 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31162 \begin_layout Standard
31163 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31171 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31175 \begin_inset space ~
31180 is set to “Default”.
31181 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31190 \begin_layout Subsection
31194 \begin_layout Standard
31195 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31196 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31197 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31198 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31200 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31201 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31204 \begin_layout Standard
31205 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31206 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31212 \begin_inset space ~
31220 \begin_layout Description
31223 thepage prints the current page number
31226 \begin_layout Description
31229 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31232 \begin_layout Description
31235 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31238 \begin_layout Description
31241 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31242 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31249 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31252 because it usually goes in a left header.
31255 \begin_layout Description
31258 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31259 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31261 It is normally used in the right header.
31264 \begin_layout Subsection
31265 Default header/footer
31268 \begin_layout Standard
31269 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31270 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31271 footer has the page number.
31272 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31273 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31274 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31277 \begin_inset space ~
31285 \begin_layout Subsection
31289 \begin_layout Standard
31290 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31291 Some pages are different.
31292 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31293 a new part or chapter in your book.
31294 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31295 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31296 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31299 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31300 Header and footer decoration line
31303 \begin_layout Standard
31304 By default, you get a 0.4
31305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31308 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31309 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31321 in the following way:
31324 \begin_layout Standard
31331 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31334 \begin_layout Standard
31335 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31344 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31351 \begin_layout Standard
31352 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31354 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31355 \begin_inset space ~
31359 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31368 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31369 Several header/footer lines
31372 \begin_layout Standard
31373 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31374 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31375 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31377 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31392 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31393 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31395 \begin_inset space ~
31403 \begin_layout Standard
31410 headheight}{height}
31413 \begin_layout Standard
31414 where height is a size in standard units.
31415 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31416 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31417 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31418 logfile with the menu
31420 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31426 \begin_inset space ~
31431 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31436 \begin_inset Index idx
31439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31441 -packages ! fancyhdr
31447 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31448 for your header/footer.
31451 \begin_layout Subsection
31455 \begin_layout Standard
31456 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31457 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31458 This example consists of the following definition:
31461 \begin_layout Description
31463 \begin_inset space ~
31472 , empty optional argument
31475 \begin_layout Description
31477 \begin_inset space ~
31480 Header empty, empty optional argument
31483 \begin_layout Description
31485 \begin_inset space ~
31494 in the optional argument
31497 \begin_layout Description
31499 \begin_inset space ~
31508 in the optional argument
31511 \begin_layout Description
31513 \begin_inset space ~
31526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31530 \begin_inset Newline newline
31534 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31541 in the optional argument
31544 \begin_layout Description
31546 \begin_inset space ~
31555 , empty optional argument
31558 \begin_layout Description
31561 headrulewidth set to 2
31562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31568 \begin_layout Standard
31569 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31570 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31576 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31585 \begin_layout Standard
31586 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31592 \begin_layout Standard
31596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31600 pagestyle{headings}
31606 \begin_inset Note Note
31609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31610 switches back to page style with the default headings
31618 \begin_layout Section
31619 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31622 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31627 \begin_inset Index idx
31630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31637 \begin_inset Index idx
31640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31649 \begin_layout Standard
31651 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31652 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31653 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31656 \begin_layout Subsection
31660 \begin_layout Standard
31661 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31667 \begin_inset Index idx
31670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31672 -packages ! preview-latex
31677 (on some systems named simply
31682 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31684 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31690 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31692 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31700 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31701 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31702 -package are automatically
31703 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31707 \begin_layout Subsection
31711 \begin_layout Standard
31712 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31713 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31715 activate the option
31718 \begin_inset space ~
31725 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31731 \begin_inset space ~
31735 \begin_inset space ~
31738 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31745 \begin_inset space ~
31758 \begin_inset space ~
31763 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31766 \begin_layout Standard
31767 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31772 \begin_inset space ~
31780 \begin_inset space ~
31788 \begin_layout Standard
31789 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31790 and when you finish
31794 \begin_layout Standard
31795 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31803 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31804 generated by activating the option
31807 \begin_inset space ~
31813 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31821 \begin_layout Subsection
31822 Selected document parts
31825 \begin_layout Standard
31826 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31827 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31828 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31829 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31831 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31833 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31837 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31838 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31839 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31842 \begin_layout Standard
31843 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31850 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31862 is explained in section
31864 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31869 \begin_inset space ~
31879 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31880 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31881 the final rotated boxes,
31882 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31883 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31885 Here is the result:
31888 \begin_layout Standard
31889 \begin_inset Preview
31891 \begin_layout Standard
31896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31900 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31906 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31916 height_special "totalheight"
31921 backgroundcolor "none"
31924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31949 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31955 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31977 \begin_layout Standard
31978 Previewing works also for colors.
31979 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31998 is explained in section
32005 \begin_inset space ~
32018 \begin_layout Standard
32019 \begin_inset Preview
32021 \begin_layout Standard
32025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32044 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32049 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32068 \begin_layout Standard
32069 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32075 \begin_layout Standard
32076 If \SpecialChar LyX
32077 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32078 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32079 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32080 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32081 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32082 the \SpecialChar TeX
32084 If \SpecialChar LyX
32085 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32086 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32088 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32089 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32090 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32093 \begin_layout Subsection
32098 \begin_layout Standard
32099 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32100 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32103 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32105 \begin_inset space ~
32110 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32112 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32114 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32115 's main window, then only this selection
32116 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32117 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32118 the source view window.
32123 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32124 ; but note that if you have
32125 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32127 not just the one which is open at the time.
32130 \begin_layout Section
32131 Advanced Find and Replace
32132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32134 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32139 \begin_inset Index idx
32142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32149 \begin_inset Index idx
32152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32161 \begin_layout Subsection
32165 \begin_layout Standard
32166 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32167 allows for searching of complex,
32168 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32170 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32171 The key-features are:
32174 \begin_layout Itemize
32175 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32176 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32177 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32181 \begin_layout Itemize
32182 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32183 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32184 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32185 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32188 \begin_layout Itemize
32189 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32190 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32191 outside of mathematics environments
32194 \begin_layout Itemize
32195 Search may be widened to a specific
32200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32204 \begin_inset space ~
32207 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32208 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32215 \begin_layout Itemize
32216 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32217 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32222 \begin_inset space ~
32225 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32228 \begin_layout Subsection
32232 \begin_layout Standard
32233 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32235 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32248 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32251 ) or the toolbar button
32254 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32260 Advanced Find and Replace
32265 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32269 \begin_layout Standard
32275 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32279 \begin_inset space ~
32284 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32287 arg "paragraph-break"
32291 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32292 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32296 arg "paragraph-break"
32299 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32303 searches backwards.
32306 \begin_layout Standard
32310 \begin_inset space ~
32315 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32324 \begin_inset space ~
32329 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32333 Searching for mathematics
32336 \begin_layout Standard
32337 Mathematical formulas, such as
32338 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32341 or something more complex like
32342 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32345 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32350 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32351 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32352 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32353 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32359 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32363 \begin_layout Standard
32364 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32365 This is done by switching to the
32369 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32374 This way, entering in the
32381 \begin_layout Itemize
32382 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32383 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32386 \begin_layout Itemize
32387 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32388 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32391 \begin_layout Itemize
32392 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32393 of it only within section headings.
32394 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32395 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32399 \begin_layout Itemize
32400 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32401 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32404 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32408 \begin_layout Standard
32409 The entries made in the
32413 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32416 \begin_inset space ~
32422 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32426 button or alternatively press
32429 arg "paragraph-break"
32436 while the cursor is in the
32439 \begin_inset space ~
32447 \begin_layout Standard
32448 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32450 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32454 \begin_layout Itemize
32455 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32456 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32464 with its typewriter version
32465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32479 \begin_layout Itemize
32480 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32486 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32498 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32505 (you may want to enable the
32508 \begin_inset space ~
32516 \begin_inset space ~
32521 options and disable the
32529 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32537 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32538 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32542 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32545 , or occurrences of
32546 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32550 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32556 \begin_layout Subsection
32560 \begin_layout Standard
32561 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32566 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32568 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32570 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32579 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32585 This is done with the context menu
32587 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32588 Insert Regular Expression
32590 while the cursor is in the
32595 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32596 expression matching rules
32600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32601 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32608 \begin_inset space ~
32611 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32612 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32618 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32619 same text in the document.
32620 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32621 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32624 \begin_layout Enumerate
32625 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32630 editor the fraction
32631 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32635 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32638 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32639 fractions with the given denominator.
32642 \begin_layout Enumerate
32643 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32655 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32660 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32661 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32662 Also, by inserting a
32663 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32666 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32667 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32670 \begin_layout Standard
32671 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32672 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32673 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32676 , and referring back to them through
32677 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32681 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32685 For example, try searching with the regexp
32686 \begin_inset Newline newline
32689 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32692 \begin_inset Newline newline
32695 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32698 \begin_layout Standard
32699 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32702 \begin_layout Standard
32703 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32711 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32712 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32713 sub-expressions is absolute.
32715 \begin_inset space ~
32719 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32722 always refers to the first occurrence of
32723 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32726 in all entered regexps.
32734 \begin_layout Section
32736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32738 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32743 \begin_inset Index idx
32746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32755 \begin_layout Standard
32757 has a built-in spell checker.
32760 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32767 key or the toolbar button
32770 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32773 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32774 beginning of the currently selected text.
32775 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32776 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32777 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32778 scrolled so that it is visible.
32779 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32780 n, if any could be found.
32781 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32785 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32786 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32789 \begin_layout Standard
32790 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32793 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32797 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32798 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32800 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32801 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32804 \begin_inset space ~
32812 arg "dialog-show character"
32815 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32817 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32820 \begin_layout Standard
32821 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32822 can be downloaded from here:
32823 \begin_inset Newline newline
32827 \begin_inset Flex URL
32830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32832 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32838 \begin_inset Newline newline
32842 \begin_inset space ~
32845 files for each language.
32846 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32847 \begin_inset space ~
32850 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32851 's installation subfolder
32859 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32861 \begin_inset Newline newline
32864 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32865 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32866 but in most cases these are
32882 is the language code.
32885 \begin_layout Subsection
32889 \begin_layout Standard
32892 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32893 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32895 \begin_inset space ~
32898 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32901 you can set the following things:
32904 \begin_layout Description
32906 \begin_inset space ~
32909 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32910 should use for spell checking.
32911 Depending on your platform,
32925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32926 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32927 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32942 \begin_inset space ~
32945 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32948 \begin_layout Description
32950 \begin_inset space ~
32953 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32954 will always use the given language
32955 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32958 \begin_layout Description
32960 \begin_inset space ~
32963 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32969 \begin_inset space \space{}
32973 This should normally not be needed.
32976 \begin_layout Description
32978 \begin_inset space ~
32982 \begin_inset space ~
32985 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32997 \begin_layout Description
32999 \begin_inset space ~
33002 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33003 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33004 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33005 appear in a context menu.
33006 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33010 \begin_layout Description
33012 \begin_inset space ~
33016 \begin_inset space ~
33020 \begin_inset space ~
33023 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33027 \begin_layout Section
33029 \begin_inset Index idx
33032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33041 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33048 \begin_layout Standard
33050 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33051 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33061 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33063 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33072 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33074 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33075 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33076 which are available for many languages.
33079 \begin_layout Standard
33080 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33081 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33085 \begin_layout Subsection
33086 Setting up the thesaurus
33089 \begin_layout Standard
33098 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33102 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33107 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33113 \begin_inset space ~
33121 For instance, the US English files are named:
33124 \begin_layout Itemize
33128 \begin_layout Itemize
33132 \begin_layout Standard
33141 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33142 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33145 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33146 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33147 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33149 \begin_inset space ~
33154 ) to the path where they are installed.
33158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33159 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33160 ies, typical locations are
33166 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33170 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33174 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33177 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33183 LibreOffice-<Version>
33190 On the Mac, the default location is
33192 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33193 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33194 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33195 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33196 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33197 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33205 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33206 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33207 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33211 \begin_layout Standard
33212 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33213 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33217 \begin_layout Itemize
33218 \begin_inset Flex URL
33221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33223 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33231 \begin_layout Standard
33232 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33233 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33235 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33236 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33237 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33239 \begin_inset space ~
33244 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33246 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33247 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33251 \begin_layout Standard
33252 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33254 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33257 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33263 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33266 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33267 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33275 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33276 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33277 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33279 \begin_inset space ~
33284 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33287 \begin_layout Subsection
33288 Using the thesaurus
33291 \begin_layout Standard
33292 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33294 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33297 or the toolbar button
33300 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33303 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33305 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33307 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33308 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33309 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33318 ), related terms (such as
33321 \begin_inset space ~
33330 ), compounds (such as
33333 \begin_inset space ~
33342 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33351 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33354 \begin_layout Standard
33355 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33356 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33360 \begin_layout Standard
33361 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33362 the dictionary, such as the above
33366 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33371 \begin_inset space \space{}
33374 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33375 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33376 For example, looking up the word form
33380 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33385 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33390 \begin_inset space \space{}
33401 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33402 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33403 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33406 \begin_layout Section
33408 \begin_inset Index idx
33411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33418 \begin_inset Index idx
33421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33422 Document ! Change Tracking
33428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33430 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33437 \begin_layout Standard
33438 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33439 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33440 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33441 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33443 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33445 \begin_inset space ~
33448 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33450 \begin_inset space ~
33458 \begin_layout Standard
33459 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33473 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33474 You can change the color in
33476 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33477 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33479 \begin_inset space ~
33483 \begin_inset space ~
33488 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33494 \begin_inset Index idx
33497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33498 Color ! Change tracking
33503 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33504 's status bar when the
33505 cursor is in changed text.
33506 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33509 arg "changes-merge"
33515 \begin_layout Standard
33516 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33518 \begin_inset Index idx
33521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33530 \begin_layout Standard
33531 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33537 \begin_layout Standard
33538 \begin_inset Graphics
33539 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33547 \begin_layout Standard
33548 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33554 \begin_layout Standard
33555 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33558 \begin_layout Standard
33559 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33565 \begin_layout Standard
33566 \begin_inset Tabular
33567 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33568 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33569 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33570 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33580 arg "changes-track"
33588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33594 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33596 \begin_inset space ~
33599 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33601 \begin_inset space ~
33610 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33619 arg "changes-output"
33627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33633 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33635 \begin_inset space ~
33638 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33640 \begin_inset space ~
33644 \begin_inset space ~
33648 \begin_inset space ~
33657 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33678 Jumps to the next change
33684 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33693 arg "change-accept"
33701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33707 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33709 \begin_inset space ~
33712 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33714 \begin_inset space ~
33723 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33732 arg "change-reject"
33740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33746 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33748 \begin_inset space ~
33751 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33753 \begin_inset space ~
33762 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33771 arg "changes-merge"
33779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33785 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33787 \begin_inset space ~
33790 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33792 \begin_inset space ~
33801 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33810 arg "all-changes-accept"
33818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33824 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33826 \begin_inset space ~
33829 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33831 \begin_inset space ~
33835 \begin_inset space ~
33844 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33853 arg "all-changes-reject"
33861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33867 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33869 \begin_inset space ~
33872 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33874 \begin_inset space ~
33878 \begin_inset space ~
33887 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33910 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33911 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33913 \begin_inset space ~
33922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33945 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33947 \begin_inset space ~
33963 \begin_layout Standard
33964 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33970 \begin_layout Standard
33971 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33991 \begin_layout Standard
33992 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33993 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33994 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33995 the next change after the current cursor position.
33996 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33997 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33998 step to the next change.
33999 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34002 \begin_layout Standard
34003 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34004 to describe a change.
34007 \begin_layout Standard
34008 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34014 \begin_inset Index idx
34017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34019 -packages ! dvipost
34025 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34027 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34033 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34037 \begin_layout Section
34038 Comparison of Documents
34039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34041 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34046 \begin_inset Index idx
34049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34050 Comparison of documents
34058 \begin_layout Standard
34059 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34062 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34066 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34067 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34069 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34071 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34075 \begin_inset space ~
34079 \begin_inset space ~
34083 \begin_inset space ~
34092 \begin_inset space ~
34096 \begin_inset space ~
34100 \begin_inset space ~
34104 \begin_inset space ~
34108 \begin_inset space ~
34112 \begin_inset space ~
34117 enables the change tracking option
34120 \begin_inset space ~
34124 \begin_inset space ~
34128 \begin_inset space ~
34133 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34136 \begin_layout Section
34137 International Support
34138 \begin_inset Index idx
34141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34142 International support
34150 \begin_layout Standard
34151 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34152 with any language you want.
34153 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34154 up \SpecialChar LyX
34156 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34158 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34165 \begin_layout Standard
34166 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34167 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34168 \begin_inset space ~
34172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34174 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34181 \begin_layout Subsection
34183 \begin_inset Index idx
34186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34193 \begin_inset Index idx
34196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34197 Document ! Settings
34203 \begin_inset Index idx
34206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34207 Document ! Language
34215 \begin_layout Standard
34218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34219 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34222 dialog lets you set
34224 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34229 \begin_layout Standard
34234 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34239 \begin_inset space ~
34244 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34245 For details about the different encoding options see section
34246 \begin_inset space ~
34250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34252 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34259 \begin_layout Subsection
34260 Keyboard mapping configuration
34261 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34263 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34270 \begin_layout Standard
34271 If you have for example a U.
34272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34275 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34276 can use an alternate keymap.
34277 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34282 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34283 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34284 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34287 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34288 \begin_inset space ~
34292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34294 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34299 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34300 which one you want to use.
34303 \begin_layout Standard
34304 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34305 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34306 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34310 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34311 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34312 one to support the characters you want.
34313 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34320 \begin_layout Chapter
34323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34325 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34332 \begin_layout Standard
34333 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34334 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34335 topic inside the user's guide.
34338 \begin_layout Section
34340 \begin_inset Index idx
34343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34352 \begin_layout Standard
34357 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34360 \begin_layout Subsection
34364 \begin_layout Standard
34365 Creates a new document.
34368 \begin_layout Subsection
34372 \begin_layout Standard
34373 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34374 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34375 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34378 \begin_layout Subsection
34382 \begin_layout Standard
34386 \begin_layout Subsection
34390 \begin_layout Standard
34391 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34392 Click there on a file to open it.
34395 \begin_layout Subsection
34399 \begin_layout Standard
34400 Closes the current document.
34403 \begin_layout Subsection
34407 \begin_layout Standard
34408 Closes all opened documents.
34411 \begin_layout Subsection
34415 \begin_layout Standard
34416 Saves the actual document.
34419 \begin_layout Subsection
34423 \begin_layout Standard
34424 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34427 \begin_layout Subsection
34431 \begin_layout Standard
34432 Saves all opened documents.
34435 \begin_layout Subsection
34439 \begin_layout Standard
34440 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34443 \begin_layout Subsection
34447 \begin_layout Standard
34448 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34449 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34450 It is described in the section
34452 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34457 Additional Features
34462 \begin_layout Subsection
34466 \begin_layout Standard
34467 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34468 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34470 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34471 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34475 \begin_layout Standard
34476 When using the menu entry
34479 \begin_inset space ~
34484 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34488 \begin_inset space ~
34492 \begin_inset space ~
34496 \begin_inset space ~
34501 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34502 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34505 \begin_layout Subsection
34507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34509 name "subsec:Export"
34516 \begin_layout Standard
34517 You can export your document to various file formats.
34518 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34520 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34521 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34522 during its configuration.
34525 \begin_layout Standard
34526 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34528 \begin_inset space ~
34532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34534 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34541 \begin_layout Description
34547 \begin_inset space ~
34550 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34552 \begin_inset space ~
34555 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34556 \begin_inset Newline newline
34559 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34560 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34564 \begin_layout Description
34565 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34571 \begin_layout Description
34573 \begin_inset space ~
34576 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34582 \begin_layout Description
34583 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34584 's native DVI-format.
34585 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34586 files paths or file names in your document.
34588 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34595 \begin_layout Description
34596 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34597 in files paths or file names
34600 \begin_layout Description
34602 \begin_inset space ~
34609 ) DVI-format using the program
34611 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34614 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34618 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34626 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34634 \begin_layout Description
34636 \begin_inset space ~
34639 (cropped) the same as
34643 but with cropped page margins.
34646 \begin_layout Description
34648 \begin_inset space ~
34651 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34655 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34660 \begin_layout Description
34664 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34672 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34680 \begin_layout Description
34682 \begin_inset space ~
34686 \begin_inset space ~
34689 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34693 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34701 \begin_layout Description
34705 \begin_inset space ~
34714 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34715 source that is compilable with the program
34717 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34721 \begin_layout Description
34725 \begin_inset space ~
34730 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34731 source, additionally all images used in the document
34732 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34736 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34739 \begin_layout Description
34743 \begin_inset space ~
34748 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34749 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34750 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34758 \begin_layout Description
34762 \begin_inset space ~
34771 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34772 source that is compilable with the program
34778 \begin_layout Description
34780 \begin_inset space ~
34784 \begin_inset space ~
34791 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34792 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34798 \begin_layout Description
34800 \begin_inset space ~
34803 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34804 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34810 \begin_inset space \space{}
34815 \begin_inset space ~
34819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34834 represent the version number)
34837 \begin_layout Description
34839 \begin_inset space ~
34843 \begin_inset space ~
34846 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34847 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34848 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34852 \begin_layout Description
34853 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34854 's internal XHTML engine
34857 \begin_layout Description
34859 \begin_inset space ~
34863 \begin_inset space ~
34867 \begin_inset space ~
34871 \begin_inset space ~
34874 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
34879 For the conversion the program
34888 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
34891 \begin_layout Description
34892 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34897 \begin_layout Description
34899 \begin_inset space ~
34902 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
34904 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34907 For the conversion the program
34916 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
34919 \begin_layout Description
34921 \begin_inset space ~
34924 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
34925 For the conversion the program
34934 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
34937 \begin_layout Description
34939 \begin_inset space ~
34942 (cropped) the same as
34945 \begin_inset space ~
34950 but with cropped page margins
34953 \begin_layout Description
34957 \begin_inset space ~
34962 PDF-format using the program
34966 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34969 \begin_layout Description
34973 \begin_inset space ~
34977 \begin_inset space ~
34985 \begin_inset space ~
34990 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34995 \begin_inset space \space{}
34998 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35002 \begin_layout Description
35006 \begin_inset space ~
35011 PDF-format using the program
35013 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35016 , produces PDF-files directly
35019 \begin_layout Description
35023 \begin_inset space ~
35028 PDF-format using the program
35032 , produces PDF-files directly
35035 \begin_layout Description
35039 \begin_inset space ~
35044 PDF-format using the program
35048 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35051 \begin_layout Description
35055 \begin_inset space ~
35060 PDF-format using the program
35065 , produces PDF-files directly
35068 \begin_layout Description
35072 \begin_inset space ~
35080 \begin_layout Description
35084 \begin_inset space ~
35088 \begin_inset space ~
35093 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35094 and then exported as text using the program
35099 \begin_layout Description
35104 PostScript format using the program
35109 \begin_layout Description
35110 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35111 source and also code in the statistical programming
35125 it is possible to use
35129 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35133 \begin_layout Standard
35134 If one of the menu entries
35141 \begin_inset space ~
35150 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35152 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35154 \begin_inset space ~
35158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35160 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35165 \begin_inset Index idx
35168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35169 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35178 \begin_layout Subsection
35182 \begin_layout Standard
35183 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35184 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35187 \begin_inset space ~
35191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35193 reference "sec:Paths"
35198 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35207 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35208 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35209 's preferences as described in section
35210 \begin_inset space ~
35214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35216 reference "subsec:Converters"
35223 \begin_layout Subsection
35224 New and Close Window
35227 \begin_layout Standard
35228 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35232 \begin_layout Subsection
35236 \begin_layout Standard
35237 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35240 \begin_layout Section
35242 \begin_inset Index idx
35245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35254 \begin_layout Subsection
35258 \begin_layout Standard
35259 Described in section
35260 \begin_inset space ~
35264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35266 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35273 \begin_layout Subsection
35274 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35277 \begin_layout Standard
35278 Described in section
35279 \begin_inset space ~
35283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35285 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35292 \begin_layout Subsection
35296 \begin_layout Standard
35297 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35298 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35301 \begin_layout Subsection
35305 \begin_layout Standard
35306 Selects the whole document.
35309 \begin_layout Subsection
35310 Find & Replace (Quick)
35313 \begin_layout Standard
35314 Described in section
35315 \begin_inset space ~
35319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35321 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35328 \begin_layout Subsection
35329 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35332 \begin_layout Standard
35333 Described in section
35334 \begin_inset space ~
35338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35340 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35347 \begin_layout Subsection
35348 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35351 \begin_layout Standard
35352 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35356 \begin_layout Subsection
35360 \begin_layout Standard
35361 Described in section
35362 \begin_inset space ~
35366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35368 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35375 \begin_layout Subsection
35377 \begin_inset Index idx
35380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35381 Paragraph ! Settings
35389 \begin_layout Standard
35390 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35391 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35395 \begin_layout Standard
35396 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35397 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35403 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35404 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35406 \begin_inset space ~
35414 \begin_layout Subsection
35418 \begin_layout Standard
35419 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35420 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35421 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35425 \begin_layout Standard
35426 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35428 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35429 The properties of tables are described in section
35430 \begin_inset space ~
35434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35436 reference "sec:Tables"
35440 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35441 \begin_inset space ~
35445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35447 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35454 \begin_layout Subsection
35455 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35458 \begin_layout Standard
35459 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35461 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35462 \begin_inset space ~
35466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35468 reference "sec:Nesting"
35473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35475 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35482 \begin_layout Subsection
35485 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35488 \begin_layout Standard
35489 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35490 nts of the same type.
35492 \begin_inset space ~
35496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35498 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35502 for an explanation.
35505 \begin_layout Section
35507 \begin_inset Index idx
35510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35519 \begin_layout Standard
35520 At the bottom of the
35524 menu the opened documents are listed.
35527 \begin_layout Subsection
35528 Open/Close all Insets
35531 \begin_layout Standard
35532 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35535 \begin_layout Subsection
35536 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35539 \begin_layout Standard
35540 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35543 \begin_layout Standard
35544 Math macros are described in the
35551 \begin_layout Subsection
35555 \begin_layout Standard
35556 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35557 \begin_inset space ~
35561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35563 reference "sec:Navigating"
35568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35570 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35577 \begin_layout Subsection
35581 \begin_layout Standard
35582 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35584 \begin_inset space ~
35588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35590 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35597 \begin_layout Subsection
35601 \begin_layout Standard
35602 Opens a window showing console messages.
35603 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35605 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35608 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35609 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35610 is processing the document.
35613 \begin_layout Subsection
35615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35617 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35622 \begin_inset Index idx
35625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35634 \begin_layout Standard
35635 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35636 All toolbars and the
35639 \begin_inset space ~
35644 can be turned on and off.
35649 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35661 \begin_inset space ~
35673 \begin_inset space ~
35678 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35682 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35689 \begin_layout Standard
35694 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35698 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35699 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35700 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35701 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35702 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35705 \begin_layout Standard
35707 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35708 \begin_inset space ~
35712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35714 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35721 \begin_layout Subsection
35725 \begin_layout Standard
35729 \begin_inset space ~
35733 \begin_inset space ~
35737 \begin_inset space ~
35741 \begin_inset space ~
35745 \begin_inset space ~
35749 \begin_inset space ~
35754 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35755 's main window vertically while
35758 \begin_inset space ~
35762 \begin_inset space ~
35766 \begin_inset space ~
35770 \begin_inset space ~
35774 \begin_inset space ~
35778 \begin_inset space ~
35783 will split it horizontally.
35784 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35785 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35786 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35787 three or more documents at the same time.
35788 To close a split view, use the menu
35791 \begin_inset space ~
35795 \begin_inset space ~
35803 \begin_layout Subsection
35807 \begin_layout Standard
35808 Closes a split view.
35811 \begin_layout Subsection
35815 \begin_layout Standard
35816 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35817 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35818 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35819 's main window fullscreen.
35820 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35821 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35824 \begin_layout Section
35826 \begin_inset Index idx
35829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35838 \begin_layout Subsection
35842 \begin_layout Standard
35843 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35844 \begin_inset space ~
35848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35850 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35861 \begin_layout Subsection
35863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35865 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35872 \begin_layout Standard
35873 Here you can insert the following characters:
35876 \begin_layout Description
35881 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35884 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35885 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35886 -packages you have installed.
35887 You can get a complete display by checking
35890 \begin_inset space ~
35896 \begin_inset Newline newline
35900 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35908 Not all characters will be visible in the
35912 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35920 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
35924 ) can display every character.
35932 \begin_layout Description
35933 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35937 \begin_layout Description
35939 \begin_inset space ~
35943 \begin_inset space ~
35946 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35947 \begin_inset space ~
35951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35953 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35960 \begin_layout Description
35962 \begin_inset space ~
35965 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35968 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35969 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35975 \begin_layout Description
35977 \begin_inset space ~
35980 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35983 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35984 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35990 \begin_layout Description
35992 \begin_inset space ~
35995 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35999 \begin_layout Description
36001 \begin_inset space ~
36004 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36008 \begin_layout Description
36010 \begin_inset space ~
36013 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36019 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36025 \begin_layout Description
36027 \begin_inset space ~
36030 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36034 \begin_layout Description
36036 \begin_inset space ~
36040 \begin_inset Index idx
36043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36050 \begin_inset Index idx
36053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36054 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36059 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36060 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36062 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36068 \begin_inset Index idx
36071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36079 \begin_inset Newline newline
36082 More information about this feature can be found in the
36088 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36094 \begin_layout Description
36095 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36097 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36098 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36102 \begin_layout Subsection
36106 \begin_layout Standard
36107 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36110 \begin_layout Description
36111 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36112 \begin_inset script superscript
36114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36123 \begin_layout Description
36124 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36125 \begin_inset script subscript
36127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36136 \begin_layout Description
36138 \begin_inset space ~
36141 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36142 \begin_inset space ~
36146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36148 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36155 \begin_layout Description
36157 \begin_inset space ~
36160 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36161 \begin_inset space ~
36165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36167 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36174 \begin_layout Description
36176 \begin_inset space ~
36179 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36180 \begin_inset space ~
36184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36186 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36193 \begin_layout Description
36195 \begin_inset space ~
36198 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36204 \begin_inset space \space{}
36207 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36208 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36217 To insert a fraction use the command
36222 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36226 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36235 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36242 \begin_layout Description
36244 \begin_inset space ~
36247 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36248 \begin_inset space ~
36252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36254 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36261 \begin_layout Description
36263 \begin_inset space ~
36266 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36267 \begin_inset space ~
36271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36273 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36280 \begin_layout Description
36282 \begin_inset space ~
36285 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36286 \begin_inset space ~
36290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36292 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36299 \begin_layout Description
36300 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36301 \begin_inset space ~
36305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36307 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36314 \begin_layout Description
36316 \begin_inset space ~
36319 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36320 \begin_inset space ~
36324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36326 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36333 \begin_layout Description
36335 \begin_inset space ~
36338 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36339 \begin_inset space ~
36343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36345 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36352 \begin_layout Description
36354 \begin_inset space ~
36358 \begin_inset space ~
36361 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36362 \begin_inset space ~
36366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36368 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36375 \begin_layout Description
36377 \begin_inset space ~
36380 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36381 as described in section
36382 \begin_inset space ~
36386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36388 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36395 \begin_layout Description
36397 \begin_inset space ~
36400 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36401 \begin_inset space ~
36405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36407 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36414 \begin_layout Description
36416 \begin_inset space ~
36419 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36420 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36422 \begin_inset space ~
36426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36428 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36435 \begin_layout Description
36437 \begin_inset space ~
36440 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36441 \begin_inset space ~
36445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36447 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36454 \begin_layout Description
36456 \begin_inset space ~
36460 \begin_inset space ~
36463 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36464 \begin_inset space ~
36468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36470 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36477 \begin_layout Subsection
36481 \begin_layout Standard
36482 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36486 \begin_inset space ~
36507 are described in section
36508 \begin_inset space ~
36512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36514 reference "sec:toc"
36523 is described in section
36524 \begin_inset space ~
36528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36530 reference "sec:Index"
36538 is described in section
36539 \begin_inset space ~
36543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36545 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36551 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36554 is described in section
36555 \begin_inset space ~
36559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36561 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36568 \begin_layout Subsection
36572 \begin_layout Standard
36573 To insert floats, as described in section
36574 \begin_inset space ~
36578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36580 reference "sec:Floats"
36584 and in detail the chapter
36591 \begin_inset space ~
36599 \begin_layout Subsection
36603 \begin_layout Standard
36604 To insert notes, described in section
36605 \begin_inset space ~
36609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36611 reference "sec:Notes"
36618 \begin_layout Subsection
36622 \begin_layout Standard
36623 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36625 Branches are described in section
36626 \begin_inset space ~
36630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36632 reference "sec:Branches"
36639 \begin_layout Subsection
36643 \begin_layout Standard
36644 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36645 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36647 An example is the document class
36648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36655 with three custom insets.
36658 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36662 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36668 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36671 \begin_layout Subsection
36673 \begin_inset Index idx
36676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36685 \begin_layout Standard
36686 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36688 For more information see chapter
36690 External Document Parts
36693 \begin_inset space ~
36699 \begin_layout Subsection
36701 \begin_inset Index idx
36704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36713 \begin_layout Standard
36714 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36715 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36722 \begin_inset space ~
36730 \begin_layout Subsection
36734 \begin_layout Standard
36739 dialog as described in section
36740 \begin_inset space ~
36744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36746 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36753 \begin_layout Subsection
36757 \begin_layout Standard
36762 as described in section
36763 \begin_inset space ~
36767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36769 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36776 \begin_layout Subsection
36780 \begin_layout Standard
36785 as described in section
36786 \begin_inset space ~
36790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36792 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36799 \begin_layout Subsection
36801 \begin_inset Index idx
36804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36811 \begin_inset Index idx
36814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36815 Longtables ! Caption
36823 \begin_layout Standard
36824 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36825 Floats are described in section
36826 \begin_inset space ~
36830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36832 reference "sec:Floats"
36836 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36843 \begin_inset space ~
36851 \begin_layout Subsection
36855 \begin_layout Standard
36856 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36857 \begin_inset space ~
36861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36863 reference "sec:Index"
36870 \begin_layout Subsection
36874 \begin_layout Standard
36875 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36876 \begin_inset space ~
36880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36882 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36889 \begin_layout Subsection
36893 \begin_layout Standard
36894 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36895 Tables are described in section
36896 \begin_inset space ~
36900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36902 reference "sec:Tables"
36906 and in detail in the chapter
36913 \begin_inset space ~
36921 \begin_layout Subsection
36925 \begin_layout Standard
36931 Graphics are described in section
36932 \begin_inset space ~
36936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36938 reference "sec:Graphics"
36945 \begin_layout Subsection
36949 \begin_layout Standard
36950 Inserts a URL as described in section
36951 \begin_inset space ~
36955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36957 reference "subsec:URLs"
36964 \begin_layout Subsection
36968 \begin_layout Standard
36969 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36970 \begin_inset space ~
36974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36976 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36983 \begin_layout Subsection
36987 \begin_layout Standard
36988 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36989 \begin_inset space ~
36993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36995 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37002 \begin_layout Subsection
37006 \begin_layout Standard
37007 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37008 \begin_inset space ~
37012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37014 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37021 \begin_layout Subsection
37025 \begin_layout Standard
37026 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37027 title or caption of a float.
37028 Inserts a short title as described in section
37029 \begin_inset space ~
37033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37035 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37042 \begin_layout Subsection
37047 \begin_layout Standard
37048 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37049 Code box as described in section
37050 \begin_inset space ~
37054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37056 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37063 \begin_layout Subsection
37065 \begin_inset Index idx
37068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37077 \begin_layout Standard
37078 Inserts a program listings box.
37079 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37081 Program Code Listings
37086 \begin_inset space ~
37094 \begin_layout Subsection
37098 \begin_layout Standard
37099 Inserts the actual date.
37100 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37104 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37112 \begin_inset space ~
37120 \begin_layout Subsection
37124 \begin_layout Standard
37125 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37126 \begin_inset space ~
37130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37132 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37139 \begin_layout Section
37141 \begin_inset Index idx
37144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37153 \begin_layout Standard
37154 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37155 \begin_inset space ~
37158 of the current document.
37159 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37162 \begin_layout Subsection
37166 \begin_layout Standard
37167 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37168 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37169 to jump, for example, between section
37170 \begin_inset space ~
37174 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37175 \begin_inset space ~
37178 2.5 and use the submenu
37181 \begin_inset space ~
37185 \begin_inset space ~
37192 \begin_inset space ~
37198 \begin_inset space ~
37202 \begin_inset space ~
37208 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37212 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37218 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37221 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37224 \begin_layout Standard
37225 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37229 \begin_inset space ~
37234 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37237 \begin_inset space ~
37242 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37245 \begin_layout Subsection
37246 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37249 \begin_layout Standard
37250 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37254 \begin_layout Subsection
37258 \begin_layout Standard
37259 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37260 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37261 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37265 \begin_inset space ~
37269 \begin_inset space ~
37277 \begin_layout Subsection
37281 \begin_layout Standard
37282 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37285 The \SpecialChar LyX
37286 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37288 \begin_inset space ~
37296 \begin_inset space ~
37301 manual for a detailed description.
37304 \begin_layout Section
37306 \begin_inset Index idx
37309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37318 \begin_layout Subsection
37322 \begin_layout Standard
37323 Change Tracking is described in section
37324 \begin_inset space ~
37328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37330 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37337 \begin_layout Subsection
37345 \begin_layout Standard
37346 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37347 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37348 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37350 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37351 to the clipboard or update the view.
37352 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37356 \begin_layout Subsection
37357 Start Appendix Here
37360 \begin_layout Standard
37361 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37362 as described in section
37363 \begin_inset space ~
37367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37369 reference "sec:Appendices"
37376 \begin_layout Subsection
37378 \begin_inset space ~
37384 \begin_layout Standard
37385 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37386 default output format for the document (menu
37388 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37389 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37390 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37392 \begin_inset space ~
37396 \begin_inset space ~
37402 \begin_inset space ~
37406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37408 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37412 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37415 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37416 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37418 \begin_inset space ~
37421 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37423 \begin_inset space ~
37426 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37428 \begin_inset space ~
37432 \begin_inset space ~
37438 \begin_inset space ~
37442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37444 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37448 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37449 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37451 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37452 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37454 \begin_inset space ~
37457 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37459 \begin_inset space ~
37462 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37466 \begin_inset space ~
37470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37472 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37477 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37478 when it is first configured.
37479 The default output format is
37482 \begin_inset space ~
37490 \begin_layout Subsection
37491 View (Other Formats)
37494 \begin_layout Standard
37495 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37496 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37497 actual document with an external program.
37498 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37499 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37500 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37502 All possible formats are listed in section
37503 \begin_inset space ~
37507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37509 reference "subsec:Export"
37514 You should at least see the menu entry
37519 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37521 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37523 \begin_inset space ~
37527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37529 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37534 \begin_inset Index idx
37537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37538 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37547 \begin_layout Standard
37548 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37549 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37551 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37552 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37554 \begin_inset space ~
37557 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37559 \begin_inset space ~
37562 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37566 \begin_inset space ~
37570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37572 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37577 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37578 when it is first configured.
37581 \begin_layout Subsection
37583 \begin_inset space ~
37589 \begin_layout Standard
37590 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37591 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37594 \begin_layout Subsection
37595 Update (Other Formats)
37598 \begin_layout Standard
37599 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37600 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37603 \begin_layout Subsection
37604 View Master Document
37607 \begin_layout Standard
37608 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37624 \begin_inset space ~
37629 manual for more information on this topic).
37630 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37631 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37635 \begin_inset space ~
37639 \begin_inset space ~
37644 generates the output of the whole book, while
37648 will just output the chapter alone.
37651 \begin_layout Standard
37652 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37653 in the document settings (menu
37655 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37656 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37657 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37659 \begin_inset space ~
37663 \begin_inset space ~
37669 \begin_inset space ~
37673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37675 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37679 ) or in the preferences (menu
37681 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37682 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37684 \begin_inset space ~
37687 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37689 \begin_inset space ~
37692 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37694 \begin_inset space ~
37698 \begin_inset space ~
37704 \begin_inset space ~
37708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37710 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37717 \begin_layout Subsection
37718 Update Master Document
37721 \begin_layout Standard
37722 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37738 \begin_inset space ~
37743 manual for more information on this topic).
37744 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37745 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37748 \begin_layout Standard
37749 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37750 in the document settings (menu
37752 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37753 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37754 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37756 \begin_inset space ~
37760 \begin_inset space ~
37766 \begin_inset space ~
37770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37772 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37776 ) or in the preferences (menu
37778 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37779 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37781 \begin_inset space ~
37784 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37786 \begin_inset space ~
37789 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37791 \begin_inset space ~
37795 \begin_inset space ~
37801 \begin_inset space ~
37805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37807 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37814 \begin_layout Subsection
37816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37818 name "subsec:Compressed"
37825 \begin_layout Standard
37826 Un/compresses the current document.
37827 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37828 compression (see the
37830 Additional Features
37832 manual for details).
37835 \begin_layout Subsection
37839 \begin_layout Standard
37840 The document settings are described in appendix
37841 \begin_inset space ~
37845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37847 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37854 \begin_layout Section
37856 \begin_inset Index idx
37859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37868 \begin_layout Subsection
37872 \begin_layout Standard
37873 Spell checking is explained in section
37874 \begin_inset space ~
37878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37880 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37887 \begin_layout Subsection
37891 \begin_layout Standard
37892 The thesaurus is described in section
37893 \begin_inset space ~
37897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37899 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37906 \begin_layout Subsection
37908 \begin_inset Index idx
37911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37918 \begin_inset Index idx
37921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37930 \begin_layout Standard
37931 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37932 the highlighted document part.
37935 \begin_layout Subsection
37941 \begin_inset Index idx
37944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37945 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37954 \begin_layout Standard
37955 Generates with the help of the program
37957 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37960 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37961 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37962 This feature is not available on Windows.
37965 \begin_layout Subsection
37971 \begin_inset Index idx
37974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37984 \begin_layout Standard
37985 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37990 \begin_inset space ~
37995 to see the full filename paths.
37998 \begin_layout Subsection
38000 \begin_inset Index idx
38003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38012 \begin_layout Standard
38013 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38014 files as described in section
38015 \begin_inset space ~
38019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38021 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38028 \begin_layout Subsection
38030 \begin_inset Index idx
38033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38046 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38064 \begin_inset Index idx
38067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38068 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38077 \begin_layout Standard
38078 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38079 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38080 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38081 -packages and programs it needs; see
38083 \begin_inset space ~
38087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38089 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38096 \begin_layout Subsection
38100 \begin_layout Standard
38105 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38106 \begin_inset space ~
38110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38112 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38119 \begin_layout Section
38121 \begin_inset Index idx
38124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38133 \begin_layout Standard
38134 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38135 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38137 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38141 \begin_layout Standard
38145 \begin_inset space ~
38150 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38151 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38152 packages and classes found
38153 by \SpecialChar LyX
38155 \begin_inset space ~
38159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38161 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38168 \begin_layout Standard
38172 \begin_inset space ~
38177 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38182 \begin_layout Section
38184 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38186 name "sec:Toolbars"
38193 \begin_layout Standard
38194 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38195 \begin_inset space ~
38199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38201 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38208 \begin_layout Standard
38209 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38210 This is described in the
38212 Additional Features
38217 \begin_layout Subsection
38219 \begin_inset Index idx
38222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38231 \begin_layout Standard
38232 \begin_inset Graphics
38233 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38241 \begin_layout Standard
38242 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38248 \begin_layout Standard
38249 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38266 \begin_inset Note Note
38269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38270 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38275 manual for more information.
38283 \begin_layout Standard
38284 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38290 \begin_layout Standard
38291 \begin_inset Tabular
38292 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38293 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38294 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38295 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38301 \begin_inset Graphics
38302 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38316 pull-down box for the environments
38329 \begin_layout Standard
38330 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38336 \begin_layout Standard
38338 \begin_inset Tabular
38339 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38340 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38341 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38342 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38343 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38366 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38373 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38396 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38403 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38426 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38433 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38442 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38456 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38463 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38472 arg "spelling-continuously"
38480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38484 Spellcheck continuously
38490 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38513 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38520 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38543 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38550 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38573 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38580 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38603 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38610 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38633 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38640 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38649 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38663 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38673 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38682 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38689 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38703 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38722 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38731 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38745 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38746 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38753 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38774 Emphasize text, function of the
38776 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38778 \begin_inset space ~
38781 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38811 Set text to noun style, function of the
38813 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38815 \begin_inset space ~
38818 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38827 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38836 arg "textstyle-apply"
38844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38848 Format text using the current settings in the
38850 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38852 \begin_inset space ~
38855 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38864 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38887 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38888 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38890 \begin_inset space ~
38899 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38908 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38922 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38929 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38936 arg "tabular-insert"
38944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38950 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38957 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38966 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38978 Toggle outline window on/off,
38980 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38987 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38996 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39008 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39014 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39023 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39035 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39048 \begin_layout Subsection
39050 \begin_inset Index idx
39053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39062 \begin_layout Standard
39063 \begin_inset Graphics
39064 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39072 \begin_layout Standard
39073 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39079 \begin_layout Standard
39080 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39084 \begin_layout Standard
39085 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39091 \begin_layout Standard
39092 \begin_inset Tabular
39093 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39094 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39095 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39096 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39097 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39124 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39133 arg "layout Enumerate"
39141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39151 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39160 arg "layout Itemize"
39168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39178 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39205 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39214 arg "layout Description"
39222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39232 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39241 arg "depth-increment"
39249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39255 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39257 \begin_inset space ~
39261 \begin_inset space ~
39270 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39279 arg "depth-decrement"
39287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39293 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39295 \begin_inset space ~
39299 \begin_inset space ~
39308 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39317 arg "float-insert figure"
39325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39332 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39339 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39348 arg "float-insert table"
39356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39362 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39363 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39370 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39393 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39400 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39409 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39423 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39430 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39439 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39453 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39460 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39483 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39485 \begin_inset space ~
39494 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39503 arg "nomencl-insert"
39511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39517 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39519 \begin_inset space ~
39528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39537 arg "footnote-insert"
39545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39551 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39558 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39567 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39581 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39583 \begin_inset space ~
39592 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39615 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39616 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39618 \begin_inset space ~
39627 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39636 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39650 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39657 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39680 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39687 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39710 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39712 \begin_inset space ~
39721 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39730 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39744 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39745 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39752 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39761 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39775 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39776 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39778 \begin_inset space ~
39787 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39796 arg "dialog-show character"
39804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39810 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39812 \begin_inset space ~
39815 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39822 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39831 arg "layout-paragraph"
39839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39845 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39847 \begin_inset space ~
39856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39865 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39879 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39893 \begin_layout Subsection
39894 View/Update Toolbar
39895 \begin_inset Index idx
39898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39899 Toolbar ! View / Update
39907 \begin_layout Standard
39908 \begin_inset Graphics
39909 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39916 \begin_layout Standard
39917 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39923 \begin_layout Standard
39924 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39928 \begin_layout Standard
39929 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39935 \begin_layout Standard
39936 \begin_inset Tabular
39937 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39938 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39939 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39940 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39941 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39971 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39980 arg "buffer-update"
39988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39994 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40001 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40010 arg "master-buffer-view"
40018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40024 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40026 \begin_inset space ~
40035 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40044 arg "master-buffer-update"
40052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40058 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40060 \begin_inset space ~
40064 \begin_inset space ~
40073 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40082 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40096 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40097 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40098 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40099 Synchronize with Output
40105 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40129 View (Other Formats)
40135 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40142 arg "update-others"
40150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40156 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40157 Update (Other Formats)
40170 \begin_layout Standard
40171 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40175 \begin_layout Subsection
40179 \begin_layout Standard
40180 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40181 \begin_inset space ~
40185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40187 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40191 , the table toolbar
40192 \begin_inset Index idx
40195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40204 \begin_inset space ~
40209 manual and the math macro toolbar
40210 \begin_inset Index idx
40213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40226 \begin_layout Chapter
40227 The Document Settings
40228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40230 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40235 \begin_inset Index idx
40238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40239 Document ! Settings
40247 \begin_layout Standard
40251 \begin_inset space ~
40256 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40257 is called with the menu
40259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40263 You can save your document settings as default with the
40265 Save as Document Defaults
40267 button in any dialog.
40268 This will create a template named
40272 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40273 when you create a new document without
40277 \begin_layout Standard
40282 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40283 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40286 \begin_layout Standard
40287 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40288 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40289 to find the one you are looking for.
40290 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40291 the submenus of the dialog.
40293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40297 \begin_inset space \space{}
40301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40308 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40309 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40310 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40313 \begin_layout Section
40317 \begin_layout Standard
40318 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40320 Document classes are described in section
40321 \begin_inset space ~
40325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40327 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40335 \begin_layout Standard
40339 \begin_inset space ~
40344 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40349 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40350 as a layout for a document class.
40351 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40353 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40362 \begin_layout Standard
40363 Some classes use special class options by default.
40364 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40368 and you can decide to use them or not.
40369 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40370 recommended you leave them untouched.
40375 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40376 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40381 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40383 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40389 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40390 \begin_inset Newline newline
40395 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40398 \begin_inset Newline newline
40401 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40402 distribution, see section
40407 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40409 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40421 \begin_layout Standard
40426 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40427 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40428 in the background if the child document
40429 is opened without its master.
40430 This way child documents are always compilable.
40431 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40438 \begin_inset space ~
40446 \begin_layout Standard
40447 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40458 \begin_inset Index idx
40461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40463 -packages ! prettyref
40469 \begin_inset Index idx
40472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40474 -packages ! refstyle
40479 for cross-references, see section
40480 \begin_inset space ~
40484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40486 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40493 \begin_layout Section
40497 \begin_layout Standard
40498 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40499 Please refer to the section
40502 \begin_inset space ~
40510 \begin_inset space ~
40515 manual for details.
40518 \begin_layout Section
40522 \begin_layout Standard
40523 Modules are explained in section
40524 \begin_inset space ~
40528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40530 reference "subsec:Modules"
40537 \begin_layout Section
40541 \begin_layout Standard
40543 \begin_inset space ~
40547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40549 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40556 \begin_layout Section
40560 \begin_layout Standard
40561 The document font settings are described in section
40562 \begin_inset space ~
40566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40568 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40575 \begin_layout Section
40579 \begin_layout Standard
40580 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40592 \begin_inset space ~
40597 and whether it should be a
40600 \begin_inset space ~
40605 can also be specified here.
40608 \begin_layout Standard
40609 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40610 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40611 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40613 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40616 \begin_layout Standard
40619 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40622 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40623 justifies the text on screen.
40624 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40628 \begin_layout Section
40632 \begin_layout Standard
40633 This dialog is described in sections
40634 \begin_inset space ~
40638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40640 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40647 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40654 \begin_layout Section
40658 \begin_layout Standard
40659 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40660 \begin_inset space ~
40664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40666 reference "subsec:Margins"
40673 \begin_layout Section
40675 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40677 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40682 \begin_inset Index idx
40685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40686 Language ! Encoding
40694 \begin_layout Standard
40695 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40696 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40697 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40699 is always encoded in utf8).
40700 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40701 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40702 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40703 -command is not known for
40704 a particular character).
40707 \begin_layout Standard
40708 If you use the option
40713 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40714 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40715 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40717 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40718 exactly one encoding.
40719 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40722 \begin_layout Standard
40724 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40725 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40726 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40727 installation supports Unicode), choose
40728 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40729 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40730 is quite incomplete, so
40731 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40736 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40737 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40738 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40739 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40740 -commands is not used, because all
40741 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40742 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40743 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40744 , two new alternative engines
40745 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40747 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40749 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40752 \begin_inset space ~
40760 \begin_inset space ~
40768 \begin_inset space ~
40774 \begin_inset space ~
40778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40780 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40785 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40789 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40792 \begin_layout Standard
40796 \begin_inset space ~
40801 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40802 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40812 The possible settings are:
40815 \begin_layout Description
40816 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40818 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40819 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40823 \begin_inset space ~
40827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40829 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40836 \begin_layout Description
40837 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40838 format you will use.
40839 In many cases this will be
40844 \begin_inset Index idx
40847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40855 If the newer package
40860 \begin_inset Index idx
40863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40865 -packages ! polyglossia
40870 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40871 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40872 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40874 this package will be used instead of
40881 \begin_layout Description
40883 \begin_inset space ~
40894 would be more appropriate.
40897 \begin_layout Description
40898 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40899 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40903 (for German texts), type in
40906 \begin_inset Newline newline
40911 usepackage{ngerman}
40914 \begin_layout Description
40915 None will not use a language package.
40916 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40919 \begin_layout Standard
40920 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40923 \begin_layout Description
40925 \begin_inset space ~
40929 \begin_inset space ~
40933 \begin_inset space ~
40940 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40946 \begin_inset Index idx
40949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40951 -packages ! inputenc
40957 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40958 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40959 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40963 \begin_layout Description
40964 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40966 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40967 commands, which may result in a big
40968 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40969 -commands are needed.
40972 \begin_layout Description
40974 \begin_inset space ~
40978 \begin_inset space ~
40981 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40984 \begin_layout Description
40986 \begin_inset space ~
40990 \begin_inset space ~
40993 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40996 \begin_layout Description
40998 \begin_inset space ~
41001 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41004 \begin_layout Description
41006 \begin_inset space ~
41010 \begin_inset space ~
41013 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41014 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41017 \begin_layout Description
41019 \begin_inset space ~
41023 \begin_inset space ~
41026 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41030 \begin_layout Description
41032 \begin_inset space ~
41036 \begin_inset space ~
41039 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41040 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41043 \begin_layout Description
41045 \begin_inset space ~
41049 \begin_inset space ~
41053 \begin_inset space ~
41056 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41057 \begin_inset space ~
41063 \begin_layout Description
41065 \begin_inset space ~
41069 \begin_inset space ~
41073 \begin_inset space ~
41076 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41077 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41080 \begin_layout Description
41082 \begin_inset space ~
41086 \begin_inset space ~
41089 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41090 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41091 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41092 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41093 \begin_inset space ~
41097 \begin_inset space ~
41103 \begin_layout Description
41105 \begin_inset space ~
41109 \begin_inset space ~
41112 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41113 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41114 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41116 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41117 \begin_inset space ~
41121 \begin_inset space ~
41127 \begin_layout Description
41129 \begin_inset space ~
41133 \begin_inset space ~
41136 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41139 \begin_layout Description
41141 \begin_inset space ~
41145 \begin_inset space ~
41148 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41151 \begin_layout Description
41153 \begin_inset space ~
41157 \begin_inset space ~
41160 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41163 \begin_layout Description
41165 \begin_inset space ~
41168 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41171 \begin_layout Description
41173 \begin_inset space ~
41176 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41179 \begin_layout Description
41181 \begin_inset space ~
41185 \begin_inset space ~
41188 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41191 \begin_layout Description
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41197 \begin_inset space ~
41203 \begin_layout Description
41205 \begin_inset space ~
41209 \begin_inset space ~
41212 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41215 \begin_layout Description
41217 \begin_inset space ~
41221 \begin_inset space ~
41227 \begin_layout Description
41229 \begin_inset space ~
41233 \begin_inset space ~
41236 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41242 \begin_inset Index idx
41245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41252 , when using this, set the document language to
41257 \begin_layout Description
41259 \begin_inset space ~
41263 \begin_inset space ~
41266 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41271 , when using this, set the document language to
41274 \begin_inset space ~
41280 \begin_layout Description
41282 \begin_inset space ~
41286 \begin_inset space ~
41289 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41295 \begin_inset Index idx
41298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41300 -packages ! japanese
41305 , when using this, set the document language to
41310 \begin_layout Description
41312 \begin_inset space ~
41316 \begin_inset space ~
41319 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41324 , when using this, set the document language to
41329 \begin_layout Description
41331 \begin_inset space ~
41335 \begin_inset space ~
41338 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41343 , when using this, set the document language to
41348 \begin_layout Description
41350 \begin_inset space ~
41353 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41356 \begin_layout Description
41358 \begin_inset space ~
41362 \begin_inset space ~
41366 \begin_inset space ~
41369 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41372 \begin_layout Description
41374 \begin_inset space ~
41378 \begin_inset space ~
41382 \begin_inset space ~
41385 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41386 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41387 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41390 \begin_layout Description
41392 \begin_inset space ~
41396 \begin_inset space ~
41402 \begin_layout Description
41404 \begin_inset space ~
41408 \begin_inset space ~
41411 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41412 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41415 \begin_layout Description
41417 \begin_inset space ~
41421 \begin_inset space ~
41424 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41430 \begin_inset Index idx
41433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41440 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41443 \begin_layout Description
41445 \begin_inset space ~
41453 \begin_inset space ~
41456 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41463 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41466 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41473 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41474 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41476 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41479 \begin_layout Description
41481 \begin_inset space ~
41485 \begin_inset space ~
41488 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41494 \begin_inset Index idx
41497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41504 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41507 \begin_layout Description
41509 \begin_inset space ~
41512 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41518 \begin_inset Index idx
41521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41523 -packages ! inputenc
41529 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41533 \begin_layout Description
41535 \begin_inset space ~
41539 \begin_inset space ~
41543 \begin_inset space ~
41546 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41547 \begin_inset space ~
41553 \begin_layout Description
41555 \begin_inset space ~
41559 \begin_inset space ~
41563 \begin_inset space ~
41566 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41567 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41568 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41572 \begin_layout Description
41574 \begin_inset space ~
41578 \begin_inset space ~
41582 \begin_inset space ~
41585 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41586 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41589 \begin_layout Section
41591 \begin_inset Index idx
41594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41601 \begin_inset Index idx
41604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41611 \begin_inset Index idx
41614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41615 Color ! Shaded boxes
41621 \begin_inset Index idx
41624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41625 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41633 \begin_layout Standard
41634 Here you can alter the font color for the
41638 (default: black), for
41641 \begin_inset space ~
41646 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41650 (default: white) and for
41653 \begin_inset space ~
41663 sets the color back to the default.
41666 \begin_layout Standard
41667 Clicking any button showing
41675 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41676 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41677 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41678 later more quickly.
41681 \begin_layout Standard
41682 Note, if you change the
41685 \begin_inset space ~
41690 font color and use the option
41693 \begin_inset space ~
41698 in the document settings under
41701 \begin_inset space ~
41706 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41707 \begin_inset space ~
41711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41713 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41720 \begin_layout Standard
41721 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41727 \begin_layout Standard
41731 \begin_inset space ~
41740 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41743 \begin_inset space ~
41746 Code after a forced page break:
41749 \begin_layout Itemize
41750 For the page color:
41751 \begin_inset Newline newline
41758 pagecolor{color name}
41761 \begin_layout Itemize
41762 For the text color:
41763 \begin_inset Newline newline
41773 \begin_layout Standard
41774 You are restricted to one of
41810 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41817 \begin_inset space ~
41823 \begin_inset Newline newline
41826 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41827 names to refer to them:
41830 \begin_layout Itemize
41836 \begin_inset Newline newline
41841 page_backgroundcolor
41844 \begin_layout Itemize
41848 \begin_inset space ~
41854 \begin_inset Newline newline
41862 \begin_layout Itemize
41866 \begin_inset space ~
41872 \begin_inset Newline newline
41880 \begin_layout Itemize
41884 \begin_inset space ~
41890 \begin_inset Newline newline
41898 \begin_layout Standard
41899 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41902 \begin_inset space ~
41910 \begin_inset space ~
41918 \begin_layout Section
41922 \begin_layout Standard
41923 Here you can adjust the
41927 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41931 as described in section
41932 \begin_inset space ~
41936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41938 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41945 \begin_layout Section
41949 \begin_layout Standard
41950 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41956 \begin_inset Index idx
41959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41971 \begin_inset Index idx
41974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41976 -packages ! jurabib
41984 Sectioned bibliography
41986 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41992 \begin_inset Index idx
41995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41997 -packages ! bibtopic
42002 and you can select a
42006 for the generation of the bibliography.
42007 For a further description see section
42008 \begin_inset space ~
42012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42014 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42021 \begin_layout Section
42025 \begin_layout Standard
42026 Here you can define the
42030 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42032 \begin_inset space ~
42036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42038 reference "sec:Index"
42045 \begin_layout Section
42049 \begin_layout Standard
42050 The PDF properties are explained in section
42051 \begin_inset space ~
42055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42057 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42064 \begin_layout Section
42068 \begin_layout Standard
42069 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42070 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42076 \begin_inset Index idx
42079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42081 -packages ! amsmath
42091 \begin_inset Index idx
42094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42096 -packages ! amssymb
42106 \begin_inset Index idx
42109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42121 \begin_inset Index idx
42124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42136 \begin_inset Index idx
42139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42141 -packages ! mathdots
42151 \begin_inset Index idx
42154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42156 -packages ! mathtools
42166 \begin_inset Index idx
42169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42181 \begin_inset Index idx
42184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42186 -packages ! stackrel
42196 \begin_inset Index idx
42199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42201 -packages ! stmaryrd
42211 \begin_inset Index idx
42214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42216 -packages ! undertilde
42221 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42224 \begin_layout Description
42225 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42226 -errors in formulas,
42227 ensure that you have this enabled.
42230 \begin_layout Description
42231 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42232 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42233 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42237 \begin_layout Description
42238 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42241 \begin_inset space ~
42253 \begin_layout Description
42254 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42257 \begin_inset space ~
42269 \begin_layout Description
42270 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42281 \begin_layout Description
42282 mathtools is used for the math commands
42318 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42325 \begin_layout Description
42326 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42328 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42337 \begin_layout Description
42338 stackrel is used for the math command
42355 \begin_layout Description
42356 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42359 \begin_layout Description
42360 undertilde is used for the math command
42368 Accents for one Character
42377 \begin_layout Section
42381 \begin_layout Standard
42382 The float placement options are described in the section
42385 \begin_inset space ~
42393 \begin_inset space ~
42401 \begin_layout Section
42405 \begin_layout Standard
42406 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42408 Program Code Listings
42413 \begin_inset space ~
42421 \begin_layout Section
42425 \begin_layout Standard
42426 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42434 set to be used and set the
42439 The itemize environment is described in section
42440 \begin_inset space ~
42444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42446 reference "sec:Itemize"
42453 \begin_layout Standard
42454 You can furthermore specify a
42457 \begin_inset space ~
42462 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42463 command of the desired character.
42464 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42471 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42477 \begin_inset space \space{}
42481 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42491 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42492 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42495 \begin_layout Standard
42496 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42504 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42505 -packages in the preamble (menu
42508 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42509 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42512 \begin_inset space ~
42518 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42522 usepackage{textcomp}
42525 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42529 usepackage{amssymb}
42539 \begin_layout Section
42543 \begin_layout Standard
42544 Branches are described in section
42545 \begin_inset space ~
42549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42551 reference "sec:Branches"
42558 \begin_layout Section
42560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42562 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42569 \begin_layout Standard
42570 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42573 \begin_layout Description
42575 \begin_inset space ~
42579 \begin_inset space ~
42582 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42602 View Master Document
42603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42610 Update Master Document
42611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42618 menu or the toolbar.
42619 The default is set in
42621 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42622 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42624 \begin_inset space ~
42627 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42631 \begin_inset space ~
42635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42637 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42644 \begin_layout Description
42646 \begin_inset space ~
42650 \begin_inset space ~
42653 Output settings for the menu
42655 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42657 \begin_inset space ~
42663 For a detailed description see section
42665 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42670 \begin_inset space ~
42678 \begin_layout Description
42680 \begin_inset space ~
42684 \begin_inset space ~
42687 Options offers settings for the export format
42695 \begin_inset space ~
42700 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42701 \begin_inset space ~
42704 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42708 \begin_inset space ~
42713 settings are described in detail in section
42715 Math Output in XHTML
42720 \begin_inset space ~
42729 \begin_inset space ~
42733 \begin_inset space ~
42738 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42741 \begin_layout Section
42749 \begin_layout Standard
42750 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42752 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42754 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42756 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42760 \begin_layout Standard
42761 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42762 -syntax is given in section
42763 \begin_inset space ~
42767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42769 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42776 \begin_layout Chapter
42782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42784 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42789 \begin_inset Index idx
42792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42801 \begin_layout Standard
42802 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42804 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42808 It has the following submenus.
42811 \begin_layout Section
42815 \begin_layout Subsection
42819 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42820 User Interface File
42821 \begin_inset Index idx
42824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42825 Customization ! of toolbars
42831 \begin_inset Index idx
42834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42835 Customization ! of menus
42843 \begin_layout Standard
42844 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42845 interface (ui) file.
42846 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42854 \begin_layout Description
42859 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42862 \begin_layout Description
42869 the menu entries in popup context menus
42872 \begin_layout Description
42877 specifies the toolbar buttons
42880 \begin_layout Standard
42881 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42882 and edit the entries.
42885 \begin_layout Standard
42886 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42898 entries must be finished with an explicit
42923 and in the case of the
42924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42936 The syntax for the entries is:
42939 \begin_layout Standard
42940 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42969 \begin_layout Standard
42971 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42974 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42975 -functions are listed in the menu
42977 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42979 \begin_inset space ~
42987 \begin_layout Standard
42988 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42994 \begin_layout Standard
42995 For example, assuming you use the menu
42997 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43000 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43004 \begin_layout Standard
43005 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43029 \begin_layout Standard
43031 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43046 to have the sixth bookmark.
43049 \begin_layout Standard
43053 \begin_inset space ~
43058 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43059 's toolbar buttons.
43060 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43061 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43064 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43071 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43075 \begin_layout Standard
43078 Enable tool tips in main work area
43080 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43084 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43088 \begin_layout Standard
43093 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43094 should display in the menu
43096 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43098 \begin_inset space ~
43106 \begin_layout Subsection
43110 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43114 \begin_layout Standard
43117 Restore window layouts and geometries
43120 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43121 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43125 \begin_layout Standard
43128 Restore cursor positions
43130 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43134 \begin_layout Standard
43137 Load opened files from last session
43139 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43143 \begin_layout Standard
43146 Clear all session information
43148 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43149 sessions (cursor positions, names
43150 of last opened documents, etc.).
43153 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43157 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43162 \begin_inset Index idx
43165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43174 \begin_layout Standard
43177 Backup original documents when saving
43179 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43180 it was saved the last time.
43181 It is stored in the
43184 \begin_inset space ~
43190 \begin_inset space ~
43194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43196 reference "sec:Paths"
43200 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43203 \begin_inset space ~
43209 The backup file has the file extension
43210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43224 \begin_layout Standard
43227 Backup documents, every
43229 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43232 \begin_layout Standard
43235 Save documents compressed by default
43237 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43238 \begin_inset space ~
43242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43244 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43249 This applies to newly created documents only.
43250 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43253 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43254 Windows & work area
43257 \begin_layout Standard
43260 Open documents in tabs
43262 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43266 \begin_layout Standard
43271 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43284 reference "sec:Paths"
43288 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43295 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43296 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43297 of \SpecialChar LyX
43299 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43300 instance is created for each file.
43303 \begin_layout Standard
43306 Single close-tab button
43308 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43318 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43319 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43322 \begin_layout Standard
43323 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43331 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43332 before the change takes effect.
43340 \begin_layout Standard
43345 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43347 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43349 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43353 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43354 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43355 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43358 \begin_layout Subsection
43360 \begin_inset Index idx
43363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43372 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43379 \begin_layout Standard
43380 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43384 \begin_layout Standard
43385 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43393 This section only deals with the fonts
43397 the \SpecialChar LyX
43399 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43402 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43403 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43414 \begin_layout Standard
43415 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43432 (depends on the system) as its
43435 \begin_inset space ~
43451 \begin_layout Standard
43452 You can change the font size with the
43459 \begin_layout Standard
43464 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43469 points have the size of 1
43470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43474 \begin_inset space ~
43478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43480 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43485 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43490 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43491 \begin_inset space ~
43495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43497 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43504 \begin_layout Standard
43507 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43509 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43510 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43511 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43512 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43513 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43515 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43516 \begin_inset space ~
43522 \begin_layout Subsection
43524 \begin_inset Index idx
43527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43528 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43535 \begin_inset Index idx
43538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43547 \begin_layout Standard
43548 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43549 by choosing an item in the
43550 list and selecting the
43557 \begin_layout Standard
43558 By checking the option
43562 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43565 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43566 \begin_inset space ~
43570 \begin_inset space ~
43575 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43578 \begin_layout Subsection
43580 \begin_inset Index idx
43583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43592 \begin_layout Standard
43593 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43597 \begin_layout Standard
43602 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43603 This feature is described in section
43604 \begin_inset space ~
43608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43610 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43617 \begin_layout Standard
43618 Checking the option
43621 \begin_inset space ~
43625 \begin_inset space ~
43629 \begin_inset space ~
43634 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43637 \begin_layout Section
43639 \begin_inset Index idx
43642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43651 \begin_layout Subsection
43655 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43659 \begin_layout Standard
43662 Cursor follows scrollbar
43664 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43668 \begin_layout Standard
43669 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43670 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43671 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43674 \begin_layout Standard
43677 Scroll below end of document
43679 is self-explanatory.
43682 \begin_layout Standard
43683 In \SpecialChar LyX
43684 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43691 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43693 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43694 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43697 \begin_layout Standard
43700 Sort environments alphabetically
43702 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43705 \begin_layout Standard
43708 Group environments by their category
43710 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43713 \begin_layout Standard
43718 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43729 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43733 \begin_layout Standard
43734 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43739 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43740 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43744 \begin_layout Subsection
43746 \begin_inset Index idx
43749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43756 \begin_inset Index idx
43759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43760 Settings ! Shortcuts
43768 \begin_layout Standard
43773 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43775 Several binding files are available, among them:
43778 \begin_layout Description
43779 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43782 \begin_layout Description
43783 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43795 \begin_layout Description
43796 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43807 \begin_layout Standard
43808 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43813 , and binding files for special languages.
43814 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43819 \begin_inset space \space{}
43823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43831 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43832 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43833 will try to use the appropriate binding
43837 \begin_layout Standard
43838 Some binding files, like
43842 , only have a limited scope.
43843 When looking at the end of the file
43847 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43850 \begin_layout Standard
43854 \begin_inset space ~
43858 \begin_inset space ~
43863 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43864 in the selected key binding file.
43867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43871 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43876 \begin_inset Index idx
43879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43880 Key Bindings ! Editing
43888 \begin_layout Standard
43889 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43890 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43891 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43892 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43895 Show key-bindings containing
43898 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43899 Insert there for example as keyword
43900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43907 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43908 functions that contain
43909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43917 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43918 All \SpecialChar LyX
43919 functions are also listed in the file
43924 that you will find in the
43931 \begin_layout Standard
43932 For example, to add the shortcut
43940 , select the function and press the
43945 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43946 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43949 \begin_layout Standard
43950 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43951 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43953 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43954 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43956 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43961 \begin_layout Standard
43962 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43965 \begin_layout Standard
43966 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43968 The syntax of the entries is:
43971 \begin_layout Standard
43977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43996 \begin_layout Subsection
43998 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44000 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44005 \begin_inset Index idx
44008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44015 \begin_inset Index idx
44018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44019 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44027 \begin_layout Standard
44028 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44029 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44030 provides keyboard maps.
44031 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44032 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44035 \begin_inset space ~
44039 \begin_inset space ~
44044 and select the keyboard map file named
44051 \begin_layout Standard
44060 keyboard map and, if you use the
44064 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44067 arg "keymap-primary"
44073 arg "keymap-secondary"
44076 respectively or toggle between them with
44079 arg "keymap-toggle"
44085 \begin_layout Standard
44086 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44094 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44103 \begin_layout Standard
44104 You can also specify the mouse
44106 Wheel scrolling speed
44109 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44113 \begin_layout Standard
44121 \begin_inset space ~
44125 \begin_inset space ~
44130 you can select a key for zooming.
44131 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44134 \begin_layout Subsection
44138 \begin_layout Standard
44139 Input completion is described in section
44140 \begin_inset space ~
44144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44146 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44153 \begin_layout Section
44155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44162 \begin_inset Index idx
44165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44172 \begin_inset Index idx
44175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44184 \begin_layout Standard
44185 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44186 are normally determined during
44188 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44191 \begin_layout Description
44193 \begin_inset space ~
44196 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44197 's working directory.
44198 It is the default when you
44209 \begin_inset space ~
44217 \begin_layout Description
44219 \begin_inset space ~
44222 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44224 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44226 \begin_inset space ~
44230 \begin_inset space ~
44238 \begin_layout Description
44240 \begin_inset space ~
44243 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44249 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44253 \begin_inset Newline newline
44257 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44269 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44270 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44278 \begin_layout Description
44280 \begin_inset space ~
44284 \begin_inset Index idx
44287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44293 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44294 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44295 \begin_inset space ~
44299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44301 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44309 will be used to save the backups.
44310 \begin_inset Newline newline
44313 Backup files have the ending
44314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44324 \begin_layout Description
44326 \begin_inset space ~
44329 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44330 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44332 \begin_inset Newline newline
44339 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44345 You can edit this file with the program
44354 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44355 in its preferences under
44358 \begin_inset space ~
44364 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44369 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44371 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44372 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44378 and \SpecialChar LyX
44379 need to be running the same time.
44380 \begin_inset Newline newline
44383 The pipe is also used for the
44388 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44394 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44399 \begin_inset Newline newline
44402 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44403 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44404 \begin_inset Newline newline
44420 \begin_layout Description
44422 \begin_inset space ~
44425 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44428 \begin_layout Description
44430 \begin_inset space ~
44433 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44434 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44435 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44438 \begin_layout Description
44440 \begin_inset space ~
44443 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44449 You only need to specify it if you are using
44453 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44455 For \SpecialChar LyX
44460 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44464 \begin_layout Description
44466 \begin_inset space ~
44469 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44470 When \SpecialChar LyX
44471 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44472 to find it on the system.
44473 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44475 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44484 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44485 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44488 \begin_layout Description
44490 \begin_inset space ~
44493 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44494 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44495 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44496 code or in the document
44498 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44500 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44501 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44502 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44503 scanned for the input files.
44504 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44505 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44507 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44508 compilation may fail for some documents.
44511 \begin_layout Section
44515 \begin_layout Standard
44516 Here you can insert your
44525 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44527 \begin_inset space ~
44531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44533 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44537 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44540 \begin_layout Section
44542 \begin_inset Index idx
44545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44546 Language ! Settings
44552 \begin_inset Index idx
44555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44556 Settings ! Language
44564 \begin_layout Subsection
44566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44568 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44575 \begin_layout Description
44577 \begin_inset space ~
44581 \begin_inset space ~
44584 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44586 You can find its actual translation status here:
44587 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44589 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44596 \begin_layout Description
44598 \begin_inset space ~
44601 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44602 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44603 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44604 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44621 The most widespread language package is
44626 \begin_inset Index idx
44629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44636 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44638 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44639 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44640 come with the alternative
44646 \begin_inset Index idx
44649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44651 -packages ! polyglossia
44656 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44657 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44663 The available selections are described in section
44664 \begin_inset space ~
44668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44670 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44677 \begin_layout Description
44679 \begin_inset space ~
44682 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44683 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44684 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44685 An example is the start command
44691 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44693 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44697 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44712 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44717 \begin_layout Description
44719 \begin_inset space ~
44727 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44728 command toggles the package on and off.
44731 \begin_layout Description
44733 \begin_inset space ~
44737 \begin_inset space ~
44740 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44744 \begin_layout Description
44746 \begin_inset space ~
44750 \begin_inset space ~
44753 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44757 \begin_layout Description
44759 \begin_inset space ~
44763 \begin_inset space ~
44766 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44767 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44768 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44770 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44777 \begin_layout Description
44779 \begin_inset space ~
44782 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44784 When this option is not set, the
44787 \begin_inset space ~
44792 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44794 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44797 \begin_inset space ~
44805 \begin_layout Description
44807 \begin_inset space ~
44813 \begin_inset space ~
44819 When it is not set, the
44822 \begin_inset space ~
44827 is set to the end of the document.
44830 \begin_layout Description
44832 \begin_inset space ~
44836 \begin_inset space ~
44839 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44840 language will be underlined in blue.
44843 \begin_layout Description
44845 \begin_inset space ~
44849 \begin_inset space ~
44852 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44853 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44856 \begin_layout Description
44858 \begin_inset space ~
44861 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44862 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44863 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44864 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44867 \begin_layout Subsection
44871 \begin_layout Standard
44872 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44873 \begin_inset space ~
44877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44879 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44886 \begin_layout Section
44890 \begin_layout Subsection
44894 \begin_layout Description
44896 \begin_inset space ~
44900 \begin_inset space ~
44903 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44906 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44907 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44909 \begin_inset space ~
44915 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44918 \begin_layout Description
44920 \begin_inset space ~
44924 \begin_inset Index idx
44927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44934 \begin_inset Index idx
44937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44938 Settings ! Date format
44943 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44944 \begin_inset Newline newline
44948 \begin_inset Flex URL
44951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44953 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
44959 \begin_inset Newline newline
44962 For example the format
44963 \begin_inset Newline newline
44967 \begin_inset Newline newline
44970 prints the date as day/month/year.
44973 \begin_layout Description
44975 \begin_inset space ~
44979 \begin_inset space ~
44982 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44983 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44986 \begin_layout Description
44988 \begin_inset space ~
44991 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44993 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44995 \begin_inset space ~
45001 For a detailed description see section
45003 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45008 \begin_inset space ~
45016 \begin_layout Subsection
45022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45024 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45029 \begin_inset Index idx
45032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45033 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45042 \begin_layout Description
45044 \begin_inset space ~
45052 \begin_inset space ~
45056 \begin_inset space ~
45059 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45064 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45085 are used for Cyrillic.
45086 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45099 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45101 sets up in the background.
45102 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45105 \begin_layout Description
45107 \begin_inset space ~
45111 \begin_inset space ~
45114 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45119 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45123 \begin_layout Description
45125 \begin_inset space ~
45129 \begin_inset space ~
45133 \begin_inset space ~
45137 \begin_inset space ~
45140 options They only have an effect when the program
45144 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45147 \begin_layout Standard
45148 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45149 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45150 manuals of the applications.
45153 \begin_layout Description
45155 \begin_inset space ~
45158 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45159 \begin_inset space ~
45163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45165 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45172 \begin_layout Description
45174 \begin_inset space ~
45177 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45178 \begin_inset space ~
45182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45184 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45191 \begin_layout Description
45193 \begin_inset space ~
45196 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45197 \begin_inset space ~
45201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45203 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45210 \begin_layout Description
45216 \begin_inset space ~
45219 command Command for the program
45221 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45224 that is described in the section
45226 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45231 Additional Features
45236 \begin_layout Standard
45237 There are additionally the following options:
45240 \begin_layout Description
45242 \begin_inset space ~
45246 \begin_inset space ~
45250 \begin_inset space ~
45254 \begin_inset space ~
45259 \begin_inset space ~
45262 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45280 to separate folders.
45281 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45283 \begin_inset Index idx
45286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45293 \begin_inset Index idx
45296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45305 \begin_layout Description
45307 \begin_inset space ~
45311 \begin_inset space ~
45315 \begin_inset space ~
45319 \begin_inset space ~
45323 \begin_inset space ~
45327 \begin_inset space ~
45330 changes Removes all manually set
45336 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45337 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45339 \begin_inset space ~
45344 dialog when changing the document class.
45347 \begin_layout Section
45349 \begin_inset space ~
45353 \begin_inset Index idx
45356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45365 \begin_layout Subsection
45367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45369 name "subsec:Converters"
45374 \begin_inset Index idx
45377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45386 \begin_layout Standard
45387 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45388 from one format to another.
45389 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45390 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45397 \begin_inset space ~
45402 field and press the
45407 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45411 \begin_inset space ~
45416 drop-down list, modify the
45420 field and press the
45427 \begin_layout Standard
45430 Converter File Cache
45436 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45438 Maximum Age (in days
45441 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45442 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45445 \begin_layout Standard
45446 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45447 definition, is described in the section
45458 \begin_layout Subsection
45460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45462 name "sec:File-Formats"
45467 \begin_inset Index idx
45470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45477 \begin_inset Index idx
45480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45489 \begin_layout Standard
45490 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45500 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45503 \begin_layout Standard
45504 You can also define the
45506 Default output format
45508 that is used when you use
45510 View, Update, View Master Document
45514 Update Master Document
45520 menu or the toolbar.
45523 \begin_layout Standard
45524 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45535 \begin_layout Standard
45536 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45538 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45539 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45540 This is done by specifying a
45545 More about this is described in the section
45556 \begin_layout Chapter
45557 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45559 \begin_inset Index idx
45562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45569 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45571 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45578 \begin_layout Standard
45580 \begin_inset space ~
45584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45586 reference "tab:Units"
45590 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45591 and used in this documentation.
45594 \begin_layout Standard
45595 \begin_inset Float table
45601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45602 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45620 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45628 \begin_inset Tabular
45629 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45630 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45631 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45632 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45633 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45839 scaled point (65536
45840 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45881 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45918 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45955 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45991 % of original image width
45996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46307 \begin_layout Chapter
46309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46311 name "chap:Credits"
46318 \begin_layout Standard
46319 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46320 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46323 \begin_layout Itemize
46326 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46329 \begin_layout Itemize
46335 \begin_layout Itemize
46341 \begin_layout Itemize
46347 \begin_layout Itemize
46353 \begin_layout Itemize
46359 \begin_layout Itemize
46365 \begin_layout Itemize
46371 \begin_layout Itemize
46374 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46377 \begin_layout Itemize
46383 \begin_layout Itemize
46389 \begin_layout Itemize
46395 \begin_layout Itemize
46401 \begin_layout Itemize
46407 \begin_layout Itemize
46413 \begin_layout Itemize
46419 \begin_layout Itemize
46425 \begin_layout Itemize
46426 The \SpecialChar LyX
46428 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46437 \begin_layout Standard
46438 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46441 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46448 \begin_layout Bibliography
46449 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46450 LatexCommand bibitem
46456 The \SpecialChar LyX
46458 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46461 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46466 \begin_inset Newline newline
46470 \begin_inset Flex URL
46473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46475 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46483 \begin_layout Bibliography
46484 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46485 LatexCommand bibitem
46486 key "latexcompanion"
46490 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46492 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46493 Companion Second Edition.
46496 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46499 \begin_layout Bibliography
46500 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46501 LatexCommand bibitem
46506 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46509 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46513 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46516 \begin_layout Bibliography
46517 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46518 LatexCommand bibitem
46526 : A Document Preparation System.
46529 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46532 \begin_layout Bibliography
46533 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46534 LatexCommand bibitem
46543 The \SpecialChar TeX
46547 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46550 \begin_layout Bibliography
46551 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46552 LatexCommand bibitem
46557 The \SpecialChar TeX
46559 \begin_inset Newline newline
46563 \begin_inset Flex URL
46566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46568 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46576 \begin_layout Bibliography
46577 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46578 LatexCommand bibitem
46583 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46585 \begin_inset Newline newline
46589 \begin_inset Flex URL
46592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46594 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46602 \begin_layout Bibliography
46603 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46604 LatexCommand bibitem
46610 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46612 name "Documentation"
46613 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46619 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46623 \begin_inset Newline newline
46627 \begin_inset Flex URL
46630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46632 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46640 \begin_layout Bibliography
46641 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46642 LatexCommand bibitem
46648 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46650 name "Documentation"
46651 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46655 how to use the program
46657 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46661 \begin_inset Newline newline
46665 \begin_inset Flex URL
46668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46670 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46678 \begin_layout Bibliography
46679 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46680 LatexCommand bibitem
46686 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46688 name "Documentation"
46689 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46698 \begin_inset Newline newline
46702 \begin_inset Flex URL
46705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46707 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46715 \begin_layout Bibliography
46716 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46717 LatexCommand bibitem
46718 key "makeindex-man"
46723 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46726 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46735 \begin_inset Newline newline
46739 \begin_inset Flex URL
46742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46744 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
46752 \begin_layout Bibliography
46753 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46754 LatexCommand bibitem
46760 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46762 name "Documentation"
46763 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46772 \begin_inset Newline newline
46776 \begin_inset Flex URL
46779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46781 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46789 \begin_layout Bibliography
46790 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46791 LatexCommand bibitem
46797 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46799 name "Documentation"
46800 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46804 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46806 \begin_inset Newline newline
46810 \begin_inset Flex URL
46813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46815 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46823 \begin_layout Bibliography
46824 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46825 LatexCommand bibitem
46831 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46833 name "Documentation"
46834 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46838 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46844 \begin_inset Index idx
46847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46849 -packages ! caption
46855 \begin_inset Newline newline
46859 \begin_inset Flex URL
46862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46864 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46872 \begin_layout Bibliography
46873 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46874 LatexCommand bibitem
46880 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46882 name "Documentation"
46883 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46887 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46893 \begin_inset Index idx
46896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46898 -packages ! enumitem
46904 \begin_inset Newline newline
46908 \begin_inset Flex URL
46911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46913 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46921 \begin_layout Bibliography
46922 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46923 LatexCommand bibitem
46929 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46931 name "Documentation"
46932 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46936 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46942 \begin_inset Index idx
46945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46947 -packages ! fancyhdr
46953 \begin_inset Newline newline
46957 \begin_inset Flex URL
46960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46962 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46970 \begin_layout Bibliography
46971 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46972 LatexCommand bibitem
46978 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46980 name "Documentation"
46981 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46985 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46991 \begin_inset Index idx
46994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46996 -packages ! hyperref
47002 \begin_inset Newline newline
47006 \begin_inset Flex URL
47009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47011 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47019 \begin_layout Bibliography
47020 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47021 LatexCommand bibitem
47027 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47029 name "Documentation"
47030 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47034 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47040 \begin_inset Index idx
47043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47045 -packages ! nomencl
47051 \begin_inset Newline newline
47055 \begin_inset Flex URL
47058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47060 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47068 \begin_layout Bibliography
47069 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47070 LatexCommand bibitem
47076 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47078 name "Documentation"
47079 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47083 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47089 \begin_inset Index idx
47092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47094 -packages ! prettyref
47100 \begin_inset Newline newline
47104 \begin_inset Flex URL
47107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47109 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47117 \begin_layout Bibliography
47118 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47119 LatexCommand bibitem
47125 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47127 name "Documentation"
47128 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47132 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47138 \begin_inset Index idx
47141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47143 -packages ! refstyle
47149 \begin_inset Newline newline
47153 \begin_inset Flex URL
47156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47158 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47166 \begin_layout Bibliography
47167 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47168 LatexCommand bibitem
47174 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47177 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47181 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47183 \begin_inset Newline newline
47187 \begin_inset Flex URL
47190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47192 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47200 \begin_layout Bibliography
47201 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47202 LatexCommand bibitem
47208 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47211 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47215 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47217 \begin_inset Newline newline
47221 \begin_inset Flex URL
47224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47226 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47234 \begin_layout Bibliography
47235 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47236 LatexCommand bibitem
47242 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47245 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47249 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47250 for Cyrillic languages:
47251 \begin_inset Newline newline
47255 \begin_inset Flex URL
47258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47260 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47268 \begin_layout Bibliography
47269 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47270 LatexCommand bibitem
47276 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47279 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47283 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47285 \begin_inset Newline newline
47289 \begin_inset Flex URL
47292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47294 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47302 \begin_layout Bibliography
47303 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47304 LatexCommand bibitem
47310 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47313 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47317 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47319 \begin_inset Newline newline
47323 \begin_inset Flex URL
47326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47328 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47336 \begin_layout Bibliography
47337 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47338 LatexCommand bibitem
47344 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47347 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47351 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47353 \begin_inset Newline newline
47357 \begin_inset Flex URL
47360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47362 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47370 \begin_layout Bibliography
47371 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47372 LatexCommand bibitem
47378 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47381 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47385 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47387 \begin_inset Newline newline
47391 \begin_inset Flex URL
47394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47396 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47404 \begin_layout Bibliography
47405 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47406 LatexCommand bibitem
47412 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47415 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47419 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47421 \begin_inset Newline newline
47425 \begin_inset Flex URL
47428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47430 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47438 \begin_layout Bibliography
47439 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47440 LatexCommand bibitem
47446 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47449 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47453 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47455 \begin_inset Newline newline
47459 \begin_inset Flex URL
47462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47464 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47472 \begin_layout Bibliography
47473 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47474 LatexCommand bibitem
47480 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47483 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47487 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47489 \begin_inset Newline newline
47493 \begin_inset Flex URL
47496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47498 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47506 \begin_layout Bibliography
47507 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47508 LatexCommand bibitem
47514 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47517 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47521 about new features in
47527 \begin_inset Newline newline
47531 \begin_inset Flex URL
47534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47536 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47544 \begin_layout Standard
47545 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47579 \begin_inset Note Note
47582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47589 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47590 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47591 bibliography is the second one:
47599 \begin_layout Standard
47600 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47601 LatexCommand bibtex
47602 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47603 options "biblio/alphadin"
47610 \begin_layout Standard
47611 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47615 \begin_layout Standard
47616 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47617 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47623 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47624 LatexCommand printindex